Перевод: с греческого на английский

с английского на греческий

which+are+the

  • 21 καρπός

    καρπός, οῦ, ὁ (Hom.+) ‘fruit’ (the sing. used collectively: Diod S 3, 24, 1).
    ① product or outcome of someth., fruit
    ⓐ in a physical sense
    α. of plants: trees Mt 12:33; 21:19; Mk 11:14; Lk 6:44; 13:6f; IEph 14:2; Hs 1, 2, 1; 9, 1, 10; 9, 28, 1 and 3 (Did., Gen. 86, 3). Of the fruit of the vine (Jos., Ant. 2, 67; Ath 22:6) Mt 21:34; Mk 12:2; Lk 20:10; 1 Cor 9:7; 1 Cl 23:4; of a berry-bush B 7:8. Of field crops (Diod S 4, 4, 2; Ps.-Phoc. 38; SibOr 4, 16; Hippol., Ref. 7, 29, 5) 2 Ti 2:6; 1 Cl 24:4; qualified by τῆς γῆς Js 5:7a; cp. vs. 7b v.l.; 1 Cl 14:1 (Gen 4:3); GJs 3:3. συνάγειν τοὺς κ. (Lev 25:3) Lk 12:17; cp. J 4:36; ὅταν παραδοῖ ὁ κ. when the (condition of the) crop permits Mk 4:29 (‘fruit’=grain as Ps.-Scylax, Peripl. §93 p. 36 Fabr. [πυροὺς κ. κριθάς]). βλαστάνειν τὸν κ. produce crops Js 5:18 (βλαστάνω 1). ποιεῖν κ. (=עָשָׂה פְרִי) bear or yield fruit (Gen 1:11f; 4 Km 19:30; Ezk 17:23; ParJer 9:16, 19.—Diosc., Mat. Med. 2, 195) Mt 3:10 (s. δένδρον); 7:17ff; 13:26; Lk 3:9; 6:43; 8:8; 13:9; Rv 22:2a. Also διδόναι (=נָתַן פְּרִי; Lev 26:20; Dt 11:17; Ps 1:3; Zech 8:12) Mt 13:8; Mk 4:7f; B 11:6 (Ps 1:3); Hs 2:4; 5, 2, 4. φέρειν (Apollon. Rhod. 4, 1396–99b; Jo 2:22; Hos 9:16; Jos., Ant. 3, 11; SibOr 2, 320; Did., Gen. 31, 3) Mt 7:18a v.l.; J 12:24 (of the resurrection: ἐκφέρει 1 Cl 24:5); 15:2, 4; Hs 2:3, 8a. ἡ γῆ προφέρει τοὺς κ. αὐτῆς GJs 8:3. ἀποδιδόναι bear fruit (Lev 26:4) Rv 22:2b; Hs 2:8b; cp. Hb 12:11, but pay a person a portion of the fruit Mt 21:41. γεννᾶν κ. θανατηφόρον bear deadly fruit ITr 11:1 (in imagery, s. b below). κ. ἔχειν of trees Hs 9, 28, 3; of staffs 8, 1, 18; 8, 2, 1; 8, 3, 7; 8, 4, 6; 8, 5, 6; of Aaron’s staff (Num 17:23ff) 1 Cl 43:5.
    β. of a human being: Hebraistically of offspring ὁ κ. τῆς κοιλίας the fruit of the womb (Gen 30:2; Ps 131:11; Mi 6:7; La 2:20; TestAbr A 6 p. 83, 14 [Stone p. 14]; Mel., P. 52, 384 [since the central mng. of κοιλία is someth. ‘hollow’, in the Ps and Mi pass. κοιλία is used in the general sense of ‘body’ as the cavity from which someth. emanates]) Lk 1:42. τοῦ μὴ δοῦναί σοι καρπόν= to grant you no children GJs 2:3; cp. 6:3 (s. b below). Fr. the standpoint of a father: ὁ κ. τῆς ὀσφύος the fruit of his loins Ac 2:30; AcPl Ha 8, 14 (ἰσχύος Ox 1602, 12f/BMM recto 17).
    ⓑ fig., in the spiritual (opp. physical) realm; sometimes the orig. figure is quite prominent; somet. it is more or less weakened: result, outcome, product (cp. Epict. 2, 1, 21 τῶν δογμάτων καρπός; IPriene 112, 14 [I B.C.] μόνη μεγίστους ἀποδίδωσιν καρπούς; Dio Chrys. 23 [40], 34 τῆς ἔχθρας καρπός) κ. τοῦ πνεύματος Gal 5:22 (a list of virtues following a list of vices as Cebes 19, 5; 20, 3; Ael. Aristid. 37, 27 K.=2 p. 27 D.). τοῦ φωτός Eph 5:9; κ. πολὺν φέρειν be very fruitful J 15:5, 8, 16. κ. δικαιοσύνης fruit of righteousness (cp. Epicurus, Fgm. 519 δικαιοσύνης καρπὸς μέγιστος ἀταραξία; Am 6:12; Pr 11:30; 13:2; EpArist 232) Phil 1:11; Js 3:18; Hs 9, 19, 2a; cp. ἔδωκέν μοι κύριος … καρπὸν δικαιοσύνης αὐτοῦ GJs 6:3 (of the birth of Mary; s. β above); κ. εἰρηνικὸς δικαιοσύνης peaceful fruit of righteousness Hb 12:11. κ. ἀληθείας Hs 9, 19, 2b. The outcome of acting is a deed: ἀπὸ τῶν καρπῶν τινος ἐπιγινώσκειν τινά know someone by the person’s deeds, as one knows a tree by its fruits Mt 7:16, 20; Hs 4:5 (Proverbia Aesopi 51 P.: Δῆλος ἔλεγχος ὁ καρπὸς γενήσεται | παντὸς δένδρου ἣν ἔχει φύσιν=its fruit will be for every tree a clear proof of its nature). γεννᾶν καρπὸν θανατηφόρον bear deadly fruit ITr 11:1 (s. 1aα); moral performance as fruit vs. 2 (accord. to the imagery, Christians are branches of the cross as their trunk and their deeds are the produce). Fruit of martyrdom Hs 9, 28, 4. ποιεῖν τοὺς καρποὺς αὐτῆς (=τῆς βασιλείας τ. θεοῦ) prove fruitful for the kingdom ποιεῖν καρπὸν ἄξιον τῆς μετανοίας Mt 21:43. bear fruit consistent with repentance 3:8; the pl. in the parallel Lk 3:8 is farther removed fr. the orig. picture: καρποί = ἔργα (cp. Pr 10:16). καρποὶ ἀγαθοί Js 3:17. Cp. Dg 12:1. τίνα καρπὸν ἄξιον … (δώσομεν); what fruit (are we to bring to Christ that would be) worthy of what he has given us? 2 Cl 1:3. Of the outcome of life in sin as well as in righteousness Ro 6:21f (of the results of evil e.g., Oenomaus Fgm. 2m [in Eus., PE 5, 20, 10]); ταχὺς κ. (s. ταχ. 1a) 2 Cl 20:3. After an upright life καρπὸν προσδοκῶν Dg 12:6; cp. 12:8; resurrection as the reward after a miserable life ἔδονται τῆς ἑαυτῶν ὁδοῦ τοὺς κ. 2 Cl 19:3.—ἀφʼ οὗ καρποῦ ἡμεῖς (the suffering of Jesus,) the fruit from which we are, i.e. from which we derive our identity as Christians (the cross is here viewed as a tree on which Jesus hangs as the fruit: Ignatius probably thinks of Christians as germinated seeds) ISm 1:2.—Of the proceeds of a collection Ro 15:28.
    ⓒ Hebraistically, a praise-offering as καρπὸς χειλέων (Hos 14:3; Pr 18:20; 31:31 v.l.; PsSol 15:3) Hb 13:15.
    ② advantage, gain, profit (Polyaenus 3, 9, 1 κ. τῆς ἀνδραγαθίας; EpArist 260 σοφίας κ.; Philo, Fug. 176 ἐπιστήμης; Jos., Ant. 20, 48 εὐσεβείας) κ. ἔργου gain from the labor Phil 1:22. οὐ δόμα, ἀλλὰ τὸν καρπόν not the gift, but the advantage (accruing to the Philippians fr. their generous giving) 4:17; κ. ἔχειν have fruit Ro 1:13.—B. 511. DELG 1 καρπός. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > καρπός

  • 22 σάρξ

    σάρξ, σαρκός, ἡ (Hom.+; ‘flesh’).
    ① the material that covers the bones of a human or animal body, flesh lit. 1 Cor 15:39abcd; Hv 3, 10, 4; 3, 12, 1. The pl. (which denotes flesh in the mass [Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 5], whereas the sing. rather denotes the substance.—Herodas 4, 61; Gen 40:19; 1 Km 17:44; 4 Km 9:36; PsSol 4:19; TestJob 13:5; Philo; Jos., Ant. 12, 211; Just., A I, 26, 7; Mel., P. 52, 383; Ath. 34, 2) Lk 24:39 v.l.; Rv 19:18, 21 (4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010, 16] cannibalism out of hunger, sim. Mel., P. 52, 383; Quint. Smyrn. 11, 245: the σάρκες of the slain are food for the birds) B 10:4; metaph. Rv 17:16. It decays 1 Cl 25:3; cp. Ac 2:31 (cp. 2a below). Normally gives forth an evil odor when burned MPol 15:2. W. bones (s. ὀστέον) 1 Cl 6:3 (Gen 2:23); Lk 24:39; Eph 5:30 v.l. (metaph.). Paul speaks of his illness as a σκόλοψ τῇ σαρκί (s. σκόλοψ) 2 Cor 12:7. ἡ ἐν σαρκὶ περιτομή the physical circumcision (cp. Just., D. 10, 1 al.) Ro 2:28; cp. Eph 2:11b; Col 2:13 (ἀκροβυστία 2); Gal 6:13 (ἡ σάρξ=the flesh that is circumcised); B 9:4. Metaph.: the corrosion on the precious metals of the rich φάγεται τὰς σάρκας ὑμῶν ὡς πῦρ Js 5:3.—Ign. describes the elements of the Eucharist as σὰρξ (or αἷμα) Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ IRo 7:3; IPhld 4; ISm 7:1. Also J 6:51–56 urges that one must eat the flesh (and drink the blood) of the Human One or Son of Man (Just., A I, 66, 2; s. TPhilips, Die Verheissung der hl. Eucharistie nach Joh. 1922; Bultmann ad loc.; AWikenhauser ’48, 105f).—His anti-Docetic position also leads Ign. to use the concept ‘flesh (and blood) of Christ’ in other contexts as well ITr 8:1; IPhld 5:1.—For Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12; and 1 Cor 15:50 s. 3a.
    ② the physical body as functioning entity, body, physical body
    ⓐ as substance and living entity (Aeschyl., Sept. 622: opp. νοῦς; Ex 30:32; 4 Km 6:30; TestAbr A 20 p. 103, 6 [Stone p. 54] πάντα τὰ μέλη τῆς σαρκός μου; w. καρδία or ψυχή Alex. Aphr., An. p. 98, 7–10 Br.; Ps 37:8; 62:2; Eccl 2:3; Ezk 11:19; 44:7 a1.; Jos., Bell. 6, 47, Ant. 19, 325; Ar.15, 7) οὔτε ἡ σὰρξ αὐτοῦ εἶδεν διαφθοράν Ac 2:31 (but s. 1). W. ψυχή 1 Cl 49:6 (Tat. 13:2 al.). W. καρδία Ac 2:26 (Ps 15:9).—Eph 5:29. ἑόρακαν τὸ πρόσωπόν μου ἐν σαρκί they have seen me face to face Col 2:1. ἕως ἂν τὸν χριστὸν ἐν σαρκὶ ἴδῃ before he had seen the Messiah in person GJs 24:4 (cp. Lk 2:26). Opp. πνεῦμα (Ath. 31:3; PGM 5, 460 ἐπικαλοῦμαί σε τὸν κτίσαντα πᾶσαν σάρκα κ. πᾶν πνεῦμα) 1 Cor 5:5; 2 Cor 7:1; Col 2:5; 1 Pt 4:6; Hm 3:1; 10, 2, 6; cp. AcPl Ant 13:17 (=Aa, I 237, 2; s. οἶδα); also in relation to Christ (though this is disputed) J 6:63; Hs 5, 6, 5–7; cp. 1 Ti 3:16.—ἀσθένεια τῆς σαρκός bodily ailment Gal 4:13; s. vs. 14. ἀσθενὴς τῇ σαρκί weak in the body Hs 9, 1, 2. ὁ ἀλγῶν σάρκα the one who is ill in body B 8:6. πάσχειν σαρκί 1 Pt 4:1b. Cp. 2 Cor 7:5. ἡ τῆς σαρκὸς καθαρότης the purity of the body Hb 9:13 (opp. καθαρίζειν τὴν συνείδησιν vs. 14). σαρκὸς ἀπόθεσις ῥύπου 1 Pt 3:21 (s. ῥύπος 1). The σάρξ is raised fr. the dead (s. ParJer 6:9; Theoph. Ant. 1, 7 [74, 2]) 1 Cl 26:3; 2 Cl 9:1. ἀνάστασις σαρκός AcPlCor 1:12; 2:24 (σαρκὸς ἀνάστασιν Just., D. 80, 5); cp. ἀναστήσεσθε ἔχοντες ὑγιῆ τὴν σάρκα AcPlCor 2:32. Of the body of Christ during his earthly ministry Eph 2:14 (JHart, The Enmity in His Flesh: Exp. 6th ser., 3, 1901, 135–41); Hb 10:20; 1 Pt 3:18; 4:1a; 1J 4:2; 2J 7; B 5:1, 10f; 6:7, 9; 7:5; 12:10; IEph 7:2; Pol 7:1; AcPlCor 2:6b. Married couples form μία σάρξ (Gen 2:24; s. Ath. 33, 2 τὴν σάρκα πρὸς σάρκα … κοινωνίαν.—GAicher, Mann u. Weib ein Fleisch: BZ 5, 1907, 159–65) Mt 19:5f; Mk 10:8ab; 1 Cor 6:16; Eph 5:31 (on these passages, TBurkill, ZNW 62, ’71, 115–20). δικαιώματα σαρκός behind ‘all sorts of ceremonial washings’ there are regulations that concern the physical body Hb 9:10.—On ὑποτάγητε τῷ ἐπισκόπῳ ὡς ὁ Χριστὸς τῷ πατρὶ κατὰ σάρκα IMg 13:2 s. Hdb. ad loc. and MRackl, Die Christologie des hl. Ignatius v. Ant. 1914, 228.—πνεῦμα δυνάμεως … ὁ θεὸς … κατέπεμψεν εἰς σάρκα τουτέστιν εἰς τὴν Μαρίαν God sent a powerful spirit (prob. a ref. to the kind of divine breath that brought the first human being to life [Gen 2:7]) into flesh, that is, into Mary AcPl Ha 8, 26=BMM recto 34; s. AcPlCor 1:14.
    ⓑ as someth. with physical limitations, life here on earth (ApcEsdr 4:4 p. 28, 3 Tdf. σάρκα ἀνθρωπίνην φορῶ) θλῖψιν τῇ σαρκὶ ἕξουσιν 1 Cor 7:28. Cp. 2 Cor 4:11; Col 1:24. Of Christ τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ his body with its physical limitations Col 1:22; cp. 2:11 and s. cα below (cp. En 102:5 τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν; 1QpHab 9:2; Orig., C. Cels. 6, 29, 25).—Of human life: ἀποδημεῖν τῆς σαρκός MPol 2:2 (s. ἀποδημέω). ἐπιμένειν ἐν τῇ σαρκί Phil 1:24. ζῆν ἐν σαρκί vs. 22; Gal 2:20. ἐν ς. περιπατεῖν 2 Cor 10:3a. ἐν ς. τυγχάνειν Dg 5:8a. ὄντος ἔτι ἐν ς. σου AcPlCor 1:6. τὸν ἐπίλοιπον ἐν ς. χρόνον 1 Pt 4:2. ἡ ἐπιδημία τῆς σαρκὸς ταύτης our sojourn in life 2 Cl 5:5. ἐν τῇ σαρκί in our earthly life 8:2.
    ⓒ as instrument of various actions or expressions.
    α. In Paul’s thought esp., all parts of the body constitute a totality known as ς. or flesh, which is dominated by sin to such a degree that wherever flesh is, all forms of sin are likew. present, and no good thing can live in the σάρξ Ro 7:18 (cp. Philo, Gig. 29 αἴτιον δὲ τῆς ἀνεπιστημοσύνης μέγιστον ἡ σὰρξ καὶ ἡ πρὸς σάρκα οἰκείωσις; Sextus 317 ἀγαθὸν ἐν σαρκὶ μὴ ἐπιζήτει. The OT lays no stress on a necessary relationship betw. flesh as a substance, and sin. But for Epicurus the σάρξ is the bearer of sinful feelings and desires as well as the means of sensual enjoyment: Ep. in Plut., Mor. 135c; 1087bf; 1089e; 1096c αἱ τῆς σαρκὸς ἐπιθυμίαι. Also Diog. L. 10, 145. Likew. Plut. himself: Mor. 101b ταῖς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡδοναῖς; 672e; 688d; 734a; Ps.-Plut., Mor. 107f σαρκὶ καὶ τοῖς πάθεσι ταύτης; Maximus Tyr. 33, 7a. Cp. 4 Macc 7:18 τὰ τῆς σαρκὸς πάθη; Philo, Deus Imm. 143 σαρκὸς ἡδονή, Gig. 29; TestJud 19:4; TestZeb 9:7; ApcMos 25 [p. 14, 2 Tdf.] εἰς τὴν ἁμαρτίαν τῆς σαρκός); Ro 6:19; 7:25 (opp. νοῦς); 8:3a, 4–9 (cp. Persius 2, 63 scelerata pulpa, which contaminates devotion to deity), 12f; Gal 5:13, 24; Col 2:23; Jd 23; AcPlCor 2:11, 15; Dg 6:5 (opp. ψυχή, as Plut., Mor. 101b). Opp. τὸ πνεῦμα Ro 8:4, 5, 6, 9, 13; Gal 3:3; 5:16, 17ab; 6:8ab; J 3:6; B 10:9. τὸ μὲν πνεῦμα πρόθυμον, ἡ δὲ σὰρξ ἀσθενής (cp. Orig., C. Cels. 2, 25, 8) Mt 26:41; Mk 14:38; Pol 7:2. σὰρξ ἁμαρτίας sinful flesh Ro 8:3b. ἐπιθυμία (τῆς) σαρκός (cp. Maximus Tyr. 20, 9f σαρκῶν … ἐπιθυμίας) Gal 5:16; 1J 2:16; B 10:9. Pl. Eph 2:3a, cp. b; 2 Pt 2:18; cp. Ro 13:14. τὰ ἔργα τῆς σαρκός Gal 5:19 (s. Vögtle at πλεονεξία). τὰ θελήματα τῆς σαρκός Eph 2:3b. ὁ νοῦς τῆς σαρκός Col 2:18. τὸ σῶμα τῆς σαρκός the body of (sinful) flesh 2:11; cp. 1:22 and s. b above (cp. Sir 23:17 σῶμα σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ; En 102:5 τῷ σώματι τῆς σαρκὸς ὑμῶν). τὰ τῆς σαρκός what pertains to (sinful) flesh Ro 8:5b. ἐν (τῇ) σαρκὶ εἶναι be in an unregenerate (and sinful) state Ro 7:5; 8:8f. τὰ ἔθνη ἐν σαρκί Eph 2:11a. κατὰ σάρκα εἶναι Ro 8:5a; ζῆν vs. 12b; 13; Dg 5:8b; περιπατεῖν Ro 8:4; 2 Cor 10:2; βουλεύεσθαι 1:17; στρατεύεσθαι 10:3b; cp. IRo 8:3 (opp. κατὰ γνώμην θεοῦ).
    β. source of the sexual urge. The σάρξ is the source of the sexual urge, without any suggestion of sinfulness connected w. it ἐκ θελήματος σαρκὸς ἐγεννήθησαν J 1:13.
    ⓓ as someth. attractive 2 Pt 2:10 (a Hebraism, cp. Judg 2:12; 3 Km 11:10; Sir 46:10). S. also 3b.
    ③ one who is or becomes a physical being, living being with flesh
    ⓐ of humans person, human being: πᾶσα σάρξ every person, everyone (LXX; TestAbr B 7 p. 112, 3 [Stone p. 72]; GrBar 4:10; ApcEsdr 7:7; ApcMos 13 [p. 7, 1 Tdf.]; Mel., P. 55, 400: for כָּל-בָּשָׂר; s. πᾶς 1aα) Lk 3:6 (Is 40:5); J 17:2; Ac 2:17 (Jo 3:1); 1 Pt 1:24 (Is 40:6); 1 Cl 59:3; 64; 2 Cl 7:6; 17:5 (the last two Is 66:24); AcPlCor 2:6a. οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ no person, nobody (En 14:21 end.—W-S. §26, 10a; B-D-F §275, 4; 302, 1; Rob. 752) Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; Ro 3:20 (cp. Ps 142:2 πᾶς ζῶν); 1 Cor 1:29 (μή); Gal 2:16.—Though ς. in the foll. passages refers to body in its physical aspect, it cannot be divorced from its conjunction with αἷμα, and the unit σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα (cp. Sir 17:31; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 26 [Stone p. 82]; Philo, Quis Div. Rer. Her. 57; Just., D. 135, 6) refers to a human being in contrast to God and other transcendent beings Mt 16:17; Gal 1:16; Eph 6:12 (here vice versa, αἷ. καὶ ς.). τὰ παιδία κεκοινώνηκεν αἵματος καὶ σαρκός the children share mortal nature Hb 2:14, but with suggestion of its frailty, as indicated by the context with its ref. to death. Because they are the opposites of the divine nature σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα βασιλείαν θεοῦ κληρονομῆσαι οὐ δύναται 1 Cor 15:50 (JJeremias, NTS 2, ’56, 151–59). For Jd 7 s. b next. Cp. AcPl Ant 13, 17 (=Aa I 237, 2) σαρκί personally (s. οἶδα 2).
    ⓑ of transcendent entities ὁ λόγος σὰρξ ἐγένετο J 1:14 (RSeeberg, Festgabe AvHarnack dargebracht 1921, 263–81.—Artem. 2, 35 p. 132, 27 ἐὰν σάρκινοι οἱ θεοὶ φαίνωνται; Synes., Dio 6 p. 45b).—Of flesh other than human: ὀπίσω σαρκὸς ἑτέρας after another kind of flesh (cp. Judg 2:12 ὀπίσω θεῶν ἑτέρων) i.e. of divine messengers who take on ς. when they appear to humans (so Windisch et al.; difft. Frame et al. of same-sex activity) Jd 7.
    ④ human/ancestral connection, human/mortal nature, earthly descent (Did., Gen. 144, 25) Ἀβραὰμ τὸν προπάτορα ἡμῶν κατὰ σάρκα Ro 4:1 (Just., D. 43, 7 al.). οἱ συγγενεῖς μου κατὰ σάρκα 9:3. τοὺς τῆς σαρκὸς ἡμῶν πατέρας Hb 12:9. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ κατὰ σάρκα the earthly Israel 1 Cor 10:18 (opp. τὸν Ἰσραὴλ τοῦ θεοῦ Gal 6:16). Of natural descent τὰ τέκνα τῆς σαρκός children by natural descent Ro 9:8 (opp. τὰ τέκνα τῆς ἐπαγγελίας). ὁ μὲν ἐκ τῆς παιδίσκης κατὰ σάρκα γεγέννηται Gal 4:23; cp. vs. 29. μου τὴν σάρκα my compatriots Ro 11:14 (s. Gen 37:27).—Of Christ’s physical nature Ro 8:3c; Hb 5:7. Christ is descended fr. the patriarchs and fr. David (τὸ) κατὰ σάρκα according to the human side of his nature, as far as his physical descent is concerned Ro 1:3 (JDunn, Jesus: Flesh and Spirit [Ro 1:3f], JTS 24, ’73, 40–68); 9:5; 1 Cl 32:2; IEph 20:2. The context of 2 Cor 11:18 includes ancestry as a reason for boasting, but ς. in this pass. applies as well to other aspects of Paul’s career and therefore belongs more properly in 5.
    ⑤ the outward side of life as determined by normal perspectives or standards, a transf. sense of 1 and 2. Usually w. κατά indicating norm or standard σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα wise (people) according to human standards 1 Cor 1:26. καυχᾶσθαι κατὰ (τὴν) σάρκα boast of one’s outward circumstances, i.e. descent, manner of life, etc. (cp. 11:22) 2 Cor 11:18. κατὰ σάρκα Χριστόν Christ (the Messiah) from a human point of view or as far as externals are concerned 5:16b, cp. a (κατά B5bβ and 7a; also VWeber, BZ 2, 1904, 178–88; HWindisch, exc. ad loc.; Rtzst., Mysterienrel.3, 374–76; FPorter, Does Paul Claim to Have Known the Historical Jesus [2 Cor 5:16]?: JBL 47, 1928, 257–75; RMoxon, CQR 108, 1929, 320–28). οἱ κατὰ σάρκα κύριοι those who, according to human standards, are masters Eph 6:5; Col 3:22. ὑμεῖς κατὰ τὴν ς. κρίνετε you judge by outward things, by externals J 8:15. Of the route taken in one’s earthly life ἡ ὁδὸς ἡ κατὰ σάρκα IRo 9:3.—ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθέναι place one’s trust in earthly things or physical advantages Phil 3:3f. εὐπροσωπῆσαι ἐν σαρκί Gal 6:12. Onesimus is a beloved brother to Philemon καὶ ἐν σαρκὶ καὶ ἐν κυρίῳ both as a human being (=personally, in the external relationship betw. master and slave) and as a Christian Phlm 16. ὑμῶν δὲ ἐν σαρκὶ ἐπισκόπῳ IEph 1:3 (cp. IMg 3:2).—HWindisch, Taufe u. Sünde 1908; EBurton, ICC Gal. 1920, 492–95; WSchauf, Sarx 1924; WBieder, Auferstehung des Fleisches od. des Leibes?: TZ 1, ’45, 105–20. W. special ref. to Paul: Ltzm., Hdb. exc. on Ro 7:14 and 8:11; Lohmeyer (ἁμαρτία 3a); EKäsemann, Leib u. Leib Christi ’33; RGrant, ATR 22, ’40, 199–203; RBultmann, Theologie des NTs ’48, 228–49 (Engl. tr. by KGrobel, ’51 I, 227–59); LMarshall, Challenge of NT Ethics ’47, 267–70; E Schweizer, Die hellenist. Komponente im NT sarx-Begriff: ZNW 48, ’57, 237–53; two in KStendahl, The Scrolls and the NT, ’57: KKuhn, 94–113 and WDavies, 157–82; JPryke, ‘Spirit’ and ‘Flesh’ in Qumran and NT: RevQ 5, ’65, 346–60; DLys, La chair dans l’AT ’67; ASand, D. Begriff ‘Fleisch’ ’67 (Paul); RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms ’71, 49–166. On Ign.: CRichardson, The Christianity of Ign. of Ant. ’35, esp. 49 and 61. S. also the lit. s.v. πνεῦμα, end.—B. 202. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > σάρξ

  • 23 πιστεύω

    πιστεύω (Trag.+) impf. ἐπίστευον; 1 aor. ἐπίστευσα; pf. πεπίστευκα; plpf. πεπιστεύκειν Ac 14:23 (on the omission of the augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; Mlt-H. 190). Pass.: fut. 3 pl. πιστευθήσονται Gen 42, 20; 1 aor. ἐπιστεύθην; pf. πεπίστευμαι (the word does not occur in Phlm, 2 Pt, 2 and 3J, Rv, MPol, or D. But it is a special favorite of J and 1J, where it is found 96 times and 9 times respectively; πίστις is not found in the gospel at all, and occurs in 1J only once, 5:4. Our lit. uses it quite predominantly in a transcendent sense, or at least w. transcendent coloring).
    ① to consider someth. to be true and therefore worthy of one’s trust, believe
    ⓐ believe (in) someth., be convinced of someth., w. that which one believes (in) indicated
    α. by acc. of thing (Soph., Oed. Rex 646 τάδε; Aristot., Analyt. Pr. 2, 23, 68b, 13 ἅπαντα; PSI 494, 14 μηθέν; UPZ 70, 29 [152/151 B.C.] π. τὰ ἐνύπνια; ApcEsdr 7:12 p. 32, 26 τὸ βιβλίον τοῦτο) ἡ ἀγάπη πάντα πιστεύει 1 Cor 13:7. πεπιστεύκαμεν τὴν ἀγάπην we believe in the love 1J 4:16. πιστεύεις τοῦτο; J 11:26b. Cp. Ac 13:41 (Hab 1:5). Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τὸ μαρτύριον ἡμῶν our testimony was believed 2 Th 1:10b (cp. Aristot., EN 10, 2 p. 1172b, 15 ἐπιστεύοντο οἱ λόγοι; Gen 42:20).
    β. by means of a ὅτι-clause believe that (Plut., Mor. 210d; Aelian, VH 1, 16 p. 8, 9; Herm. Wr. 4, 4: Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24; PLond III, 897, 12 p. 207 [I A.D.]; Tob 10:8 S; Job 9:16; 15:31; 39:12; La 4:12; 4 Macc 7:19; TestAbr A 18 p. 100, 18 [Stone p. 48]; ParJer 6:7; Just., A I, 18, 2 al.; Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 16) μακαρία ἡ πιστεύσασα ὅτι ἔσται τελείωσις Lk 1:45 (ὅτι here may=for: s. ὅτι 4b).—Mk 11:23; cp. vs. 24; J 8:24 (ὅτι ἐγώ εἰμι as Is 43:10); 11:27, 42; 13:19; 14:10; 16:27, 30; 17:8, 21; 20:31a; Ac 9:26; Ro 6:8; 10:9; 1 Th 4:14; Hb 11:6; Js 2:19a; 1J 5:1, 5; Hv 3, 8, 4; 4, 2, 4; m 1:1; 6, 2, 10b; Hs 2:5.—[ὅτι εἷς θεός] καὶ εἷς χριστός AcPl Ha 1, 17; AcPlCor 1:8. π. περί τινος ὅτι believe concerning someone that J 9:18 (M. Ant. 1, 15, 5 πιστεύειν περὶ ὧν λέγοι ὅτι οὕτως φρονεῖ=believe concerning whatever he might say, that it was what he actually thought; Just., D. 10, 1 π. ἡμῶν• ὅτι ἐσθίομεν ἀνθρώπους.—π. περί τινος as Plut., Lyc. 19, 4; Jos., Ant. 14, 267).
    γ. by the acc. and inf. (pres. Pla., Gorg. 524a; PTebt 314, 3 [II A.D.]; 4 Macc 5:25; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 160; Just., A I, 8, 2 al.; Ath. 20, 3) πιστεύω τὸν υἱὸν τοῦ θεοῦ εἶναι τὸν Ἰησοῦν Ac 8:37b.—GMary 463, 8.—IRo 10:2.—By the inf. (Thu 2, 22, 1; Job 15:22; AscIs 2:10 εἰς οὐρανὸν ἀναβῆναι) πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι Ac 15:11 (difft. JNolland, NTS 27, ’80, 112f [inf. of result: ‘we believe (in order) to be saved’]).—By the acc. and ptc. ἐν σαρκὶ αὐτὸν πιστεύω ὄντα I believe that he was in the flesh ISm 3:1.
    δ. by means of the dat. of thing give credence to, believe (Aeschyl., Pers. 786 θεῶν θεσφάτοισιν; Soph., Phil. 1374 τοῖς ἐμοῖς λόγοις, El. 886; Pla., Phd. 88c, Leg. 7, 798d; Polyb. 5, 42, 9; 9, 33, 1; Herodian 7, 5, 5 ἐλπίδι κρείττονι; BGU 674, 6 τῷ λόγῳ; 2 Ch 9:6 τοῖς λόγοις; Ps 105:24; Pr 14:15; Sir 19:15; En 104:13 ταῖς βίβλοις; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 τοῖς κενοῖς λογισμοῖς, Virt. 68 the sayings of God; Jos., C. Ap. 2, 286, Ant. 10, 39 τ. λόγοις; Tat. 18, 2 ὕλης οἰκονομία; Ath. 30, 2 ταῖς γοναῖς τοῦ Διό; Iren. 1, 10, 2 [Harv. I 92, 4] ἡ ἐκκλησία … π. τούτοις [sc. κήρυγμα and πίστις]) οὐκ ἐπίστευσας τοῖς λόγοις μου Lk 1:20 (cp. Iambl., ViPyth. 28, 148 περὶ θεῶν μηδὲν θαυμαστὸν ἀπιστεῖν ‘concerning the gods nothing is so marvelous that it should occasion unbelief’). τῇ γραφῇ καὶ τῷ λόγῳ J 2:22. Cp. 4:50; 5:47ab. τοῖς γεγραμμένοις Ac 24:14 (Diod S 16, 52, 7 πιστεύσαντες τοῖς γεγραμμένοις). τῇ ἐπαγγελίᾳ τοῦ θεοῦ 2 Cl 11:1 (Diod S 1, 53, 10 τῇ τοῦ προρρήσει πιστεύειν; 19, 90, 3). τῷ ψεύδει, τῇ ἀληθείᾳ 2 Th 2:11, 12. τῇ καταλαλιᾷ Hm 2:2. τῇ ἀκοῇ ἡμῶν (Is 53:1; cp. Jos., C. Ap. 2, 14 π. ἀκοῇ πρεσβυτέρων) J 12:38; Ro 10:16; 1 Cl 16:3. τοῖς ἔργοις J 10:38b (=their testimony); Hm 6, 2, 10a (that they are good and must be followed).—Pass. ἐπιστεύθη τῷ λόγῳ μου they believed my word Hm 3:3.
    ε. w. prepositional expressions: εἰς Ro 4:18, if εἰς τὸ γενέσθαι αὐτόν here is dependent on ἐπίστευσεν. πιστεύειν εἰς τὴν μαρτυρίαν believe in the witness 1J 5:10c. ὁ Χριστιανισμὸς οὐκ εἰς Ἰουδαϊσμὸν ἐπίστευσεν the Christian way of life/Christianity did not commit itself to the Judean way/Judaism (s. Hdb. ad loc.) I Mg 10:3a; cp. b (Χριστιανισμόν, εἰς ὸ̔ν πᾶσα γλῶσσα πιστεύσασα). On πιστεύειν εἰς τὸ ὄνομά τινος s. 2aβ below. πιστεύετε ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ believe in the gospel (so Ps 105:12 ἐπίστευσαν ἐν τοῖς λόγοις αὐτοῦ. Rather in the sense ‘put one’s trust in’ Sir 32:21 μὴ πιστεύσῃς ἐν ὁδῷ ἀπροσκόπῳ. See B-D-F §187, 6; Rob. 540. ALoisy, Les Évangiles synopt. I 1907, 430; 434; comm.) Mk 1:15 (Hofmann understands it as ‘on the basis of’, Wohlenberg ‘bei’; Lohmeyer is undecided; Dssm. and Mlt. 67f ‘in the sphere of’; s. p. 235). ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ οὐ πιστεύω IPhld 8:2 (s. Bihlmeyer ad loc.).—ἐπί τινι: πιστεύειν ἐπὶ πᾶσιν οἷς ἐλάλησαν οἱ προφῆται Lk 24:25; Ro 9:33 (Is 28:16).
    ⓑ w. the pers. to whom one gives credence or whom one believes, in the dat. (Demosth. 18, 10; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 14 p. 1390a, 32; Polyb. 15, 26, 6 τοῖς εἰδόσι τὴν ἀλήθειαν; Herodian 2, 1, 10; PHib 72, 18; POxy 898, 29; PTebt 418, 15; Ex 4:1, 5; 3 Km 10:7; 2 Ch 32:15; Tob 2:14; Jer 47:14; JosAs 13:10; Philo, Praem. 49; Just., A I, 33, 5, D 7, 2 al.) τοῖς θεασαμένοις αὐτὸν ἐγηγερμένον οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they did not believe those who saw him after he was raised from the dead Mk 16:14. Cp. Mt 21:25, 32abc; Mk 11:31; 16:13; Lk 20:5; J 5:46a; Ac 8:12; 26:27a (τ. προφήταις as Jos., Ant. 11, 96); 1J 4:1; Hm 6, 1, 2ab.—Also of Jesus and God whom one believes, in that one accepts their disclosures without doubt or contradiction: Jesus: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 5:38, 46b; 6:30; 8:45, 46; 10:37, 38a. God: J 5:24; Ro 4:3 (Gen 15:6), 17 κατέναντι οὗ ἐπίστευσεν θεοῦ (= κατέναντι θεοῦ ᾧ ἐπίστευσεν); Gal 3:6; Js 2:23; 1 Cl 10:6 (all three Gen 15:6). ὁ μὴ πιστεύων τῷ θεῷ ψεύστην πεποίηκεν αὐτόν 1J 5:10b. AcPl Ha 3, 7.
    ⓒ w. pers. and thing added π. τινί τι believe someone with regard to someth. (X., Apol. 15 μηδὲ ταῦτα εἰκῇ πιστεύσητε τῷ θεῷ) Hm 6, 2, 6.—W. dat. of pers. and ὅτι foll. (ApcEsdr 4:35 p. 29, 12 Tdf.): πιστεύετέ μοι ὅτι ἐγὼ ἐν τῷ πατρί J 14:11a. Cp. 4:21; Ac 27:25.
    ⓓ abs. (in which case the context supplies the obj., etc.; cp. ParJer 7:19 γέγονε δὲ τοῦτο, ἵνα πιστεύσωσιν) ἐάν τις ὑμῖν εἴπῃ• ἰδοὺ ὧδε ὁ Χριστός, μὴ πιστεύσητε do not believe (him or it [the statement]) Mt 24:23; cp. vs. 26; Mk 13:21; Lk 22:67; J 3:12ab; 10:25f; 12:47 v.l.; 14:29; 16:31; 19:35; 20:8, 25; cp. GJs 19:3. J 20:29ab πιστεύσαντες those who have nevertheless believed (it=the fact of the Resurrection); Ac 4:4; 26:27b; 1 Cor 11:18 πιστεύω I believe (it=that there are divisions among you); 15:11; Js 2:19b even the daemons believe this; Jd 5. Pass. καρδίᾳ πιστεύεται with (or in) the heart men believe (it=that Jesus was raised fr. the dead) Ro 10:10.
    ⓔ believe = let oneself be influenced κατά τινος against someone Pol 6:1.
    ⓕ πιστεύομαι I am believed, I enjoy confidence (X., An. 7, 6, 33; Diod S 5, 80, 4 τοῖς μάλιστα πιστευομένοις ἐπηκολουθήσαμεν; 17, 32, 1; 1 Km 27:12; Jos., Ant. 10, 114; PGM 12, 279 πιστευθήσῃ=you will be believed) of Eve παρθένος πιστεύεται people believe that she is a virgin Dg 12:8, or perh. a virgin is entrusted (to someone without fear). S. 3 below.
    ② to entrust oneself to an entity in complete confidence, believe (in), trust, w. implication of total commitment to the one who is trusted. In our lit. God and Christ are objects of this type of faith that relies on their power and nearness to help, in addition to being convinced that their revelations or disclosures are true. The obj. is
    ⓐ given
    α. in the dat. (cp. Soph., Philoct. 1374 θεοῖς πιστ.; X., Mem. 1, 1, 5; Ps.-Pla., Epinom. 980c πιστεύσας τοῖς θεοῖς εὔχου; Ptolem. Lagi [300 B.C.]: 138 Fgm. 8 Jac.; Maximus Tyr. 3, 8k τῷ Ἀπόλλωνι; Epict., app. E, 10 p. 488 Sch. θεῷ; Himerius, Or. 8 [=23], 18 πῶς Διονύσῳ πιστεύσω; how can I trust D.?; UPZ 144, 12 [164 B.C.] τ. θεοῖς; Jdth 14:10; Wsd 16:26; 4 Macc 7:21 al. in LXX; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 229 πιστεύειν θεῷ, Rer. Div. Her. 92 μόνῳ θεῷ, Op. M. 45, Sacr. Abel. 70 τῷ σωτήρι θεῷ, Abr. 269, Mos. 1, 225, Virt. 216 [on faith in Philo s. Bousset, Rel.3 446ff; EHatch, Essays in Biblical Gk. 1889, 83ff; ASchlatter, D. Glaube im NT4 1927; EBréhier, Les idées philosophiques et religieuses de Philon d’Alexandrie 1908, 21925; HWindisch, Die Frömmigkeit Philos 1909, 23ff; HWolfson, Philo ’47 I, 143–56, esp. II, 215–18; WPeisker, D. Glaubensbegriff bei Philon, diss. ’36]; Jos., Ant. 2, 117; 333; 3, 309; 20, 48, Bell. 3, 387 [s. ASchlatter, D. Theol. d. Judentums nach d. Bericht des Jos. ’32, 104ff]; Just., A I, 18, 6 al.). Some of the passages referred to in 1b above, end, are repeated, since they may be classified here or there w. equal justification. Of God: π. τῷ θεῷ (Orig., C. Cels. 4, 89, 15) Ac 16:34; 13:12 D; Tit 3:8; PtK 4 p. 16, 2; B 16:7; Hm 12, 6, 2; Hs 5, 1, 5. Cp. m 1:2; AcPl Ha 10, 13f. τῷ κυρίῳ (Sir 11:21; 2:8) Hv 4, 2, 6. οἱ πιστεύσαντες τῷ κυρίῳ διὰ τοῦ υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ Hs 9, 13, 5. τῷ θεῷ w. ὅτι foll. m 9:7; cp. Hs 1:7.—Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l. (for ἐπʼ αὐτόν); J 6:30 (σοί=vs. 29 εἰς ὸ̔ν ἀπέστειλεν ἐκεῖνος); J 8:31 (αὐτῷ=vs. 30 εἰς αὐτόν, but see Mlt. 67f; JSwetnam argues for a plpf. sense here: Biblica 61, ’80, 106–9); Ac 5:14; 18:8a (both τῷ κυρίῳ); Ro 10:14b (οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν = τούτῳ [about equivalent to εἰς τοῦτον; cp. vs. 14a] οὗ οὐκ ἤκ.); 2 Ti 1:12; ITr 9:2; Hs 8, 3, 2.—Pass. be believed in (X., Cyr. 4, 2, 8; 6, 1, 39; Pla., Lach. 181b; Ps.-Demosth. 58, 44 al.; 1 Km 27:12; Just., D. 7, 3; Tat. 10, 2. S. B-D-F §312, 1; also s. Rob. 815f) ἐπιστεύθη ἐν κόσμῳ 1 Ti 3:16.—π. τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ υἱοῦ believe in the name of the Son, i.e. believe in the Son and accept what his name proclaims him to be 1J 3:23.
    β. w. εἰς (cp. Hippol., Elench. 6, 19, 7 W. οἱ εἰς τὸν Σίμωνα καὶ τὴν Ἑλένην πεπιστευκότες; Just., D. 35, 8 al.) God (BGU 874, 11 π. εἰς τὸν θεόν): J 12:44b; 14:1a (cp. ET 21, 1910, 53–57; 68–70; 138f); 1 Pt 1:21 v.l.=Pol 2:1.—Christ: Mt 18:6; Mk 9:42; J 2:11; 3:15 v.l., 16, 18a, 36; 4:39; 6:29, 35, 40, 47 v.l.; 7:5, 31, 38f, 48; 8:30; 9:35f; 10:42; 11:25, 26a, 45, 48; 12:11, 36 (εἰς τὸ φῶς), 37, 42, 44a, 46; 14:1b, 12; 16:9; 17:20; Ac 10:43; 14:23; 18:8 D; 19:4; Ro 10:14a; Gal 2:16; Phil 1:29; 1 Pt 1:8; 1J 5:10a; AcPlCor 2:31; Hs 8, 3, 2.—εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ (or αὐτοῦ, etc.) J 1:12; 2:23; 3:18c; 1J 5:13 (s. ὄνομα 1dβ and s. 2aα above, end). π. εἰς τὸν θάνατον αὐτοῦ ITr 2:1. π. εἰς τὸ αἷμα Χριστοῦ ISm 6:1.
    γ. w. ἐπί and dat., of God Ac 11:17 D. Of Christ: Mt 27:42 v.l.; J 3:15 v.l.; Ro 9:33; 10:11; 1 Pt 2:6 (the last three Is 28:16); 1 Ti 1:16.
    δ. w. ἐπί and acc. (Wsd 12:2; Just., D. 46, 1 al.) of God: Ac 16:34 D; Ro 4:5, 24; PtK 3 p. 15, 12. Of Christ: Mt 27:42; J 3:15 v.l.; Ac 9:42; 11:17; 16:31; 22:19.
    ε. π. ἔν τινι believe in someone (Jer 12:6; Da 6:24 Theod.; Ps 77:22) is questionable in our lit.: in J 3:15 the best rdg. is ἐν αὐτῷ and is prob. to be construed w. ἔχῃ (in J πιστεύω usually takes the prep. εἰς when expressing the obj. of belief, as in 3:16); in Eph 1:13 both occurrences of ἐν ᾧ are prob. to be construed w. ἐσφραγίσθητε (=‘in connection with whom you have been sealed’ [cp. 4:30]); the acts of hearing and believing are coordinate, and πιστεύσαντες, along w. ἀκούσαντες, is used abs. (so REB; less clearly NRSV). But s. 1aε above: π. ἐν τῷ εὐαγγελίῳ Mk 1:15; IPhld 8:2.
    ⓑ not expressed at all (the abs. πιστεύειν in a transcendent sense: Aeschin., In Ctesiph. 1 ἐγὼ πεπιστευκὼς ἥκω πρῶτον τοῖς θεοῖς; Aristot., Rhet. 2, 17, 1391b, 1ff; Plut., Mor. 170f; Porphyr., Ad Marcellam 24 πιστεῦσαι δεῖ, ὅτι [=because] μόνη σωτηρία ἡ πρὸς τὸν θεὸν ἐπιστροφή; Herm. Wr. 9, 10ab ἐπίστευσε καὶ ἐν τῇ καλῇ πίστει ἐπανεπαύσατο; cp. 1, 32 πιστεύω καὶ μαρτυρῶ=PapBerl 9795 [RReitzenstein, Studien z. antiken Synkretismus 1926, p. 161, 2]; Num 20:12; Ps 115:1; Is 7:9; Sir 2:13; 1 Macc 2:59; Philo, Rer. Div. Her. 14; 101, Deus Imm. 4, Mut. Nom. 178; τότε πιστεύσεις θέλων καὶ μὴ θέλων Theoph. Ant. 1, 8 [p. 74, 7]) Mk 15:32; 16:16f; Lk 8:12f; J 1:7, 50; 3:15, 18b; 4:41f, 48, 53; 5:44; 6:36, 47, 64ab, perh. 69 (MEnslin, The Perf. Tense in the Fourth Gosp.: JBL 55, ’36, 121–31, esp. 128); 9:38; 10:26; 11:15, 40; 12:39; 20:31b; Ac 4:4; 8:13, 37a; 11:21; 13:12, 39, 48; 14:1; 15:5, 7; 17:12, 34; 18:8b, 27; 19:2; 21:25; Ro 1:16; 3:22; 4:11; 10:4; 13:11; 15:13; 1 Cor 1:21; 3:5; 15:2; Gal 3:22; Eph 1:13, 19; 1 Th 2:10, 13; Hb 4:3; 1 Pt 2:7; 1 Cl 12:7; 2 Cl 17:3; 20:2; B 9:3; B 11:11; ISm 3:2; Hs 8, 10, 3; 9, 17, 4; 9, 22, 3. τὸ πιστεύειν faith IMg 9:2. ἐν ἀγάπῃ πιστεύειν IPhld 9:2 (ἐν ἀγάπῃ is here used adv.).—Participles in the var. tenses are also used almost subst.: (οἱ) πιστεύοντες (the) believers, (the) Christians (Orig., C. Cels. 1, 13, 34; Did., Gen. 106, 6) Ac 2:44; Ro 3:22; 1 Cor 14:22ab (opp. οἱ ἄπιστοι); 1 Th 1:7; Hs 8, 3, 3. (οἱ) πιστεύσαντες (those) who made their commitment = (those) who became believers, (the) Christians, Ac 2:44 v.l.; 4:32; 2 Th 1:10a; 2 Cl 2:3; Hs 9, 19, 1. οἱ πεπιστευκότες those who became (and remained) believers Ac 19:18; 21:20 (Just., D. 122, 2).—οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν future believers 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3a. οἱ νῦν πιστεύσαντες those who have just come to believe ibid. 4, 3, 3b.
    ⓒ A special kind of this faith is the confidence that God or Christ is in a position to help suppliants out of their distress, have confidence (some of the passages already mentioned might just as well be classified here) abs. ὡς ἐπίστευσας γενηθήτω σοι may it be done to you in accordance with the confidence you have Mt 8:13. ὅσα ἂν αἰτήσητε πιστεύοντες whatever you pray for with confidence 21:22. Cp. Mk 5:36; 9:23f; Lk 8:50; 2 Cor 4:13a (Ps 115:1), b. W. ὅτι foll.: πιστεύετε ὅτι δύναμαι τοῦτο ποιῆσαι; do you have confidence that I am able to do this? Mt 9:28.—Mk 11:23.
    ③ entrust τινί τι someth. to someone (X., Mem. 4, 4, 17; Plut., Mor. 519e; Athen. 8, 341a; Lucian, Dial. Deor. 25, 1; SIG2 845, 7, see for numerous other examples index VI p. 384b. Cp. Wsd 14:5; 1 Macc 8:16; 4 Macc 4:7; TestJob 11:11; Jos., Bell. 4, 492; Hippol., Ref. 9, 12, 6) τὸ ἀληθινὸν τίς ὑμῖν πιστεύσει; Lk 16:11. αὐτῷ τοσούτων πιστευο̣μ̣έ̣ν̣ω̣ν̣ since so many (or so much) were ( was) entrusted to him AcPl Ha 7, 21 (connection uncertain). αὐτόν (so N. and Tdf.; v.l. ἑαυτόν) τινι trust oneself to someone (Brutus, Ep. 25; Plut., Mor. 181d ἀνδρὶ μᾶλλον ἀγαθῷ πιστεύσας ἑαυτὸν ἢ ὀχυρῷ τόπῳ=entrusting himself to a good man rather than to a stronghold; EpArist 270; Jos., Ant. 12, 396) J 2:24 (EStauffer, CDodd Festschr., ’56, 281–99.—Diod S 34 + 35 Fgm. 39a οὐ τοῖς τυχοῦσι φίλοις ἑαυτὸν ἐπίστευσεν=he did not trust himself to casual friends).—Pass. πιστεύομαί τι (B-D-F §159, 4) I am entrusted with someth. (Pla., Ep. 1, 309a; Polyb. 8, 17, 5; 31, 26, 7; Diod S 20, 19, 2; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 136 §568 ἃ ἐπιστεύθην; ins; pap [e.g. PLond I, 121, 608 p. 203]; Jos., Bell. 5, 567, Vi. 137; Ath. 24, 3. Cp. Esth 8:12e.—Dssm., LO 320f [LAE 379]). ἐπιστεύθησαν τὰ λόγια τοῦ θεοῦ Ro 3:2. πεπίστευμαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Gal 2:7 (PGM 13, 140 ὁ ὑπό σου πάντα πιστευθείς; 446); cp. 1 Th 2:4; 1 Ti 1:11.—Tit 1:3. οἰκονομίαν πεπίστευμαι 1 Cor 9:17; cp. Dg 7:1. S. also 7:2; IMg 6:1; IPhld 9:1ab. πιστεύομαί τι παρά τινος I am entrusted by someone with someth. (Polyb. 3, 69, 1; Jos., Bell. 1, 667): οἱ πιστευθέντες παρὰ θεοῦ ἔργον τοιοῦτο 1 Cl 43:1.
    ④ be confident about, a unique use found in ὸ̔ς μὲν πιστεύει φαγεῖν πάντα, someth. like the one is confident about eating anything Ro 14:2 (a combination of two ideas: ‘the pers. is so strong in the faith’ and: ‘the pers. is convinced that it is permissible to eat anything’; in brief: not cultically fussy. See Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.; but also B-D-F §397, 2). Another probability is the sense
    ⑤ think/consider (possible), in Ro 14:2 perh. holds everything possible; cp. J 9:18 οὐκ ἐπίστευσαν they refused to entertain the possibility, and Ac 9:26. S. 4 above.—For lit. s. πίστις, end. DELG s.v. πείθομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πιστεύω

  • 24 οὗτος

    οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο, gen. τούτου, ταύτης, τούτου, etc.: the dual fem. never in [dialect] Att., v. ὁ, ἡ, τό, init.:—demonstr. Pron.,
    A this, common from Hom. downwds.
    A ORIGIN and FORMS: οὗτος, αὕτη, τοῦτο prob. arose from a reduplication of the demonstr. ὁ, ἡ, τό with insertion of - υ- (= Skt. Particle u), e.g. ταῦτα fr. τα-υ-τα: [dialect] Dor. gen. sg. fem.

    τούτας Philol.11

    ; nom. pl.

    τοῦτοι, ταῦται A.D.Synt.111.23

    : the former occurs Sophr.24, GDI 3045 B 6 ([place name] Selinus), SIG339.16 (Rhodes, iii B. C.), etc., the latter is dub. in Sophr.97, certain in SIG 241 B117 (Delph., iv B. C.): in [dialect] Boeot. all forms begin with οὑτ-, as gen. sg. neut.

    οὕτω Supp.Epigr.3.359.11

     (iii B. C.); acc. sg. fem.

    οὕταν Corinn. Supp.2.80

    ; acc. pl. neut.

    οὗτα SIG1185.20

     (Tanagra, iii B. C.), etc.: gen. pl. fem. [dialect] Att. τούτων, Cret.

    ταυτᾶν Leg.Gort.5.19

    ; neut.

    ταύτων Michel 1334.10

     (Elis, iv B. C.).—In [dialect] Ion. sts. written ταότην, ταο̄τα, SIG283.19 (Chios, iv B. C.), 46.7 (Halic., v B. C.), al.—In [dialect] Att. οὗτος was freq. strengthd. by the demonstr. -ί, οὑτοσί, αὑτηί, τουτί, gen. τουτουί, dat. τουτῳί, acc. τουτονί; pl. nom. οὑτοιί, neut. ταυτί, etc., this man here: sts. a Particle is inserted between the Pron. and -ί, as αὑτηγί for αὑτηί γε, Ar.Ach. 784; τουτογί for τουτί γε, Id.V. 781, Av. 894, al.; ταυταγί for ταυτί γε, Id.Eq. 492, Pax 1057, al.; τουτοδί for τουτὶ δέ, Id.Pl. 227; τουτουμενί for τουτουὶ μέν, Id.Ra. 965.—In codd. the ν ἐφελκυστικόν is sts. added in the forms οὑτοσίν, οὑτωσίν, and οὑτοσίν is said to be [dialect] Att. by A.D.Pron.59.24, 82.11. [This ι is always long, and a long vowel or diphthong before it becomes short, as αὑτη?οὗτοςXί, τουτω?οὗτοςXί, οὑτοῐί, Ar.Nu. 201, Pl.44, Ach.40, etc.]
    B USAGE in regard to CONCORD. οὗτος is freq. used as a Pron. Subst.: hence neut. is folld. by gen.,

    κατὰ τοῦτο τῆς ἀκροπόλιος Hdt. 1.84

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ὕβρεως ἐλήλυθεν D.4.37

    ;

    εἰς τοῦθ' ἥκεις μανίας Id.36.48

    ;

    ταῦτα τῶν μαθημάτων Pl.Euthd. 278b

    : but quite as freq. as Adj., in which case its Subst. commonly takes the Art., οὗτος ὁ ἀνήρ or ὁ ἀνὴρ οὗτος.—But the Art. is absent,
    1 always in [dialect] Ep. Poets (exc. Od.18.114),

    οὗτος ἀνήρ Il.14.471

    , Od.1.406, etc.: sts. also in Trag., A.Pers. 122 (lyr.), 495, S.Ph. 406, OC 471, 1177: once in an Inscr., τοπεῖα:

    τούτων τὰ ἡμίσεα τοπείων IG22.1622.135

     (iv B. C.).
    2 sts. when the Noun is so specified that the Art. is not needed,

    ἐς γῆν ταύτην.., ἥντινα νῦν Σκύθαι νέμονται Hdt.4.8

    ;

    ταύτας ἃς οἱ πατέρες παρέδοσαν μελέτας Th. 1.85

    , cf. Pl.R. 449d, etc.;

    πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος, ὃν θρηνεῖς ἀεί S.El. 530

    .
    3 when οὗτος is used in local sense, here, v. infr. c. 1.5.
    4 when the Noun with which οὗτος agrees stands as its Predicate,

    αὕτη γὰρ ἦν σοι πρόφασις S.Ph. 1034

    ; δικαστοῦ αὕτη ἀρετή [ἐστι] Pl.Ap. 18a: this exception extends to cases in which the Predicate is not so distinctly separated from the Subject, αἰτίαι μὲν αὗται προυγεγένηντο these were the grievances which already existed, Th.1.66; ταύτην φήμην παρέδοσαν this was the report which.., Pl.Phlb. 16c: freq. with a [comp] Sup., κίνησις αὕτη μεγίστη δὴ.. ἐγένετο this was notably the greatest movement which.., Th.1.1, cf. 3.113: with

    πρῶτος Id.1.55

    ,98, 6.31, Ev.Luc. 2.2.
    5 when [ per.] 3rd pers. is used for [ per.] 2nd to express contempt, οὗτος ἀνήρ, οὑτοσὶ ἀνήρ, Pl.Grg. 467b, 489b, etc.
    II though οὗτος usu. agrees with the Noun that serves as Predicate, it is not rare to find it in the neut.,

    μανία δὲ καὶ τοῦτ' ἐστί E.Ba. 305

    ;

    τοῦτο γάρ εἰσι.. εὔθυναι D.19.82

    , etc.: and in pl.,

    οὐκ ἔστι ταῦτα ἀρχή Aeschin. 3.13

    ;

    ταῦτ' ἐστὶν ὁ προδότης Id.2.166

    : so with an explanatory clause added,

    τοῦτο γάρ ἐστιν ὁ συκοφάντης, αἰτιᾶσθαι μὲν πάντα ἐξελέγξαι δὲ μηδέν D.57.34

    .
    2 so also with a Noun in apposition,

    τούτοισιν μὲν ταῦτα μέλει, κίθαρις καὶ ἀοιδή Od.1.159

    ;

    τούτου τιμῶμαι, ἐν πρυτανείῳ σιτήσεως Pl.Ap. 36e

    , cf. E.Fr.323.3, etc.
    3 the neut. also may refer to a masc. or fem. Noun, καρπὸν φορέει κυάμῳ ἴσον: τοῦτο ἐπεὰν γένηται πέπον κτλ. Hdt.4.23, cf. X.An.1.5.10, etc.
    4 the neut. is also used of classes of persons, μελιτοπῶλαι καὶ τυροπῶλαι:

    τοῦτο δ' εἰς ἕν ἐστι συγκεκυφός Ar.Eq. 854

    , cf. Pl.Lg. 711a; or of an abstract fact,

    οὐκ Ἰοφῶν ζῇ;—τοῦτο γάρ τοι καὶ μόνον ἔτ' ἐστὶ λοιπὸν ἀγαθόν Ar.Ra.73

    .
    III with Prons.,
    1 personal, οὗτος σύ, in local sense, v. infr. c.1.5.
    2 interrog., τί τοῦτ' ἔλεξας; what is this that.. ? S.Ph. 1173 (lyr.), cf. Ant.7; ποίοισι τούτοις; for ποῖά ἐστι ταῦτα οἷς [ἔχεις ἐλπίδα]; Id.OC 388, cf.Ant. 1049; Νέστορ' ἔρειο ὅν τινα τοῦτον ἄγει whom he brings here, Il.11.612.
    3 with οἷος, Od.20.377, Pl.Phd. 61c.
    4 possess., πατὴρ σὸς οὗτος this father of thine, S.El. 530, cf. X.An.7.3.30.
    5 demonstr., οὗτος ἐκεῖνος, τὸν σὺ ζητέεις, where ἐκεῖνος is the Predicate, Hdt.1.32;

    τοῦτ' ἔστ' ἐκεῖνο E. Hel. 622

    , cf. Or. 804; αὐτὸ τοῦτο, v. αὐτός 1.7; τοῦτον τὸν αὐτὸν ἄνδρα this same man, S.Ph. 128.
    b exceptionally,

    Διφίλου οὗτος ὅδ' ἐστὶ τύπος IG12(5).300

     ([place name] Paros).
    IV with Numerals, τέθνηκε ταῦτα τρία ἔτη these three years, Lys.7.10codd.; [στρατείαν] ἑνδέκατον μῆνα τουτονὶ ποιεῖται for these eleven months, D.8.2, cf. 3.4;

    τριακοστὴν ταύτην ἡμέραν Men.Epit.27

    ;

    ταύτας τριάκοντα μνᾶς D.27.23

    , cf. Pl.Grg. 463b, etc.
    C SIGNIFICATION AND SPECIAL IDIOMS:
    I this, to designate the nearer, opp. ἐκεῖνος, that, the more remote, ταῦτα, like τὰ ἐνταῦθα, things round and about us, earthly things, Pl.Phd. 75e (v. l.); cf. ὅδε init.: but οὗτος sts. indicates that which is not really nearest, but most important, δεῖ.. τὸ βέλτιστον ἀεί, μὴ τὸ ῥᾷστον λέγειν: ἐπὶ ἐκεῖνο μὲν γὰρ ἡ φύσις αὐτὴ βαδιεῖται, ἐπὶ τοῦτο δὲ κτλ. D.8.72, cf. 51.3 and 18.
    2 when, of two things, one precedes and the other follows, ὅδε prop. refers to what follows, οὗτος to what precedes,

    οὐκ ἔστι σοι ταῦτ', ἀλλά σοι τάδ' ἔστι S.OC 787

    , cf. ὅδε III. 2: freq., however, where there are not two things, οὗτος refers to what follows, Il. 13.377, Od.2.306, etc.; οὔκουν.. τοῦτο γιγνώσκεις, ὅτι .. ; A.Pr. 379, etc.
    3 οὗτος is used emphat., generally in contempt, while ἐκεῖνος denotes praise, ὁ πάντ' ἄναλκις οὗτος, i.e. Aegisthus, S.El. 301;

    τούτους τοὺς συκοφάντας Pl.Cri. 45a

    ; so D.de Coron. uses οὗτος of Aeschines, ἐκεῖνος of Philip; but οὗτος is used of Philip, D.2.15, 4.3.
    b of what is familiar, τούτους τοὺς πολυτελεῖς χιτῶνας, of the Persians, X.An.1.5.8;

    οἱ τὰς τελετὰς.. οὗτοι καταστήσαντες Pl.Phd. 69c

    , cf. Men. 80a; τὸ θυλακῶδες τοῦτο the familiar bag-like thing, Thphr.HP3.7.3, cf. 3.18.11, 4.7.1;

    οἱ τὰς κόρας ταύτας ὠνούμενοι τοῖς παισίν D.Chr.31.153

    .
    4 in [dialect] Att. law-language, οὗτος is commonly applied to the opponent, whether plaintiff (as in Aeschin. 2.130 ) or defendant (as in Id.1.1); so, in the political speeches of D., οὗτοι are the opposite party, 4.1, 8.7, etc.; but in the forensic speeches, οὗτοι freq. means the judges, the court, 21.134, 36.47.
    5 much like an Adv., in local sense (cf. ὅδε init.), τίς δ' οὗτος κατὰ νῆας.. ἔρχεαι; who art thou here that comest.. ? Il.10.82; freq. in [dialect] Att., τίς οὑτοσί; who's this here? Ar.Ach. 1048; πολλὰ ὁρῶ ταῦτα πρόβατα I see many sheep here, X.An.3.5.9 (as v.l.): with Pron. of 2 pers., οὗτος σύ ho you! you there! S.OT 532, 1121, E.Hec. 1280, etc.: and then οὗτος alone like a voc., οὗτος, τί ποιεῖς; A.Supp. 911,cf.S.Aj.71, E.Alc. 773, Ar.Eq. 240, Nu. 220, al.: with a pr. n.,

    ὦ οὗτος, Αἴας S.Aj.89

    ;

    ὦ οὗτος οὗτος, Οἰδίπους Id.OC 1627

    , cf. Ar.V. 1364: with voc.,

    βέντισθ' οὗτος Theoc.5.76

    :—the fem. is rarer,

    αὕτη E.Med. 922

    ;

    αὕτη σύ Ar.Th. 610

    .—This phrase mostly implies anger, impatience, or scorn.
    II simply as antec. to ὅς, Od.2.40, S.OT 1180, etc.: freq. following relat. clause,

    ἅ γ' ἔλαβες,.. μεθεῖναι ταῦτα Id.Ph. 1247

    , cf. 1319,Ant. 183, 203, Pl.Grg. 469c.
    III = τοιοῦτος, οὗτος ἐγὼ ταχυτᾶτι Pi.O. 4.26;

    σὺ τοίνυν οὗτος εὑρέθης D.18.282

    , cf. 173.
    IV after a parenthesis, the Subject, though already named, is freq. emphat. repeated by

    οὗτος, οὐδὲ γὰρ οὐδὲ Ἀριστέης.., οὐδὲ οὗτος προσωτέρω.. ἔφησε ἀπικέσθαι Hdt.4.16

    , cf.81 (s. v. l.), 1.146, Pl.Phd. 107d, etc.
    V καὶ οὗτος is added to heighten the force of a previous word,

    ξυνεστῶτες.. ναυτικῷ ἀγῶνι, καὶ τούτῳ πρὸς Ἀθηναίους Th.4.55

    , cf. Hdt.1.147, 6.11, etc.; so

    οὐδὲ τούτου Aeschin.2.100

    ; v. infr. VIII.2.
    VI repeated, where for the second we should merely say he or it,

    τοῖσιν τούτου τοῦτον μέλεσιν.. κελαδοῦντες Ar.Ra. 1526

    , cf. Pl.La. 200d.
    VII ταῦτα is used in some special phrases,
    1 ταῦτ', ὦ δέσποτα yes Sir (i. e. ἔστι ταῦτα, ταῦτα δράσω, etc.), Ar.V. 142, Pax 275, cf. Eq.III; so

    ταῦτα δή Id.Ach. 815

    ;

    ταῦτά νυν Id.V. 1008

    ; so also ἦν ταῦτα even so, true, E.Ph. 417.
    3 καὶ ταῦτα μὲν δὴ ταῦτα so much for that, freq. in [dialect] Att., as Pl.Smp. 220c.
    4 ταῦτα at end of a formula in epitaphs, etc., prob. short for ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει or ὁ βίος ταῦτά ἐστιν, e.g. οὐδὶς ( = -εὶς) ἀθάνατος:

    ταῦτα IG14.420

    ; Προκόπι ταῦτα ib.1824; χαίρεται ( = -τε) ταῦτα ib.1479, etc.: similarly perh. in a letter,

    ἂμ μὴ πέμψῃς, οὐ μὴ φάγω, οὐ μὴ πείνω. ταῦτα POxy.119.15

     (ii/iii A. D.).
    VIII Adverbial usages:
    1 ταῦταabs., therefore, that is why.., Il.11.694;

    ταῦτ' ἄρα Ar.Ach.90

    ,Nu. 319, 335, 394, al., X.Smp.4.55;

    ταῦτα δή A.Pers. 159

    , Pl.Smp. 174a;

    ταῦτ' οὖν S.Tr. 550

    , Ar.V. 1358, etc.; αὐτὰ ταῦτα ἥκω, ἵνα .. Pl.Prt. 310e: τοῦτο is rare in this sense,

    τοῦτ' ἀφικόμην, ὅπως.. εὖ πράξαιμί τι S. OT 1005

    ; αὐτὸ γὰρ τοῦτο just because of this, Pl.Smp. 204a.
    b πρὸς ταῦτα so then, therefore, prop. used in indignant defiance, A.Pr. 992, 1043, S.Aj. 971, 1115, 1313, OT 426, OC 455, etc.
    2 καὶ ταῦτα, adding a circumstance heightening the force of what has been said, and that,

    ἄνδρα γενναῖον θανεῖν, καὶ ταῦτα πρὸς γυναικός A.Eu. 627

    : but mostly with a part.,

    ὅς γ' ἐξέλυσας ἄστυ.., καὶ ταῦθ' ὑφ' ἡμῶν οὐδὲν ἐξειδὼς πλέον S.OT37

    , cf. Ar.Ra. 704, Pl.Phdr. 241e, etc.; or with a part. omitted, ἥτις.. τὴν τεκοῦσαν ὕβρισεν, καὶ ταῦτα τηλικοῦτος (sc. οὖσα) S.El. 614; so

    καὶ ταῦτα μέντοι Pl.Erx. 400b

    .
    b καὶ ταῦτα anyhow, no matter what happens (or happened), ἐπεχείρησας, οὐδὲν ὢν καὶ ταῦτα you tried, but were no good anyhow, i.e. try as you might, Id.R. 341c, cf. Diod.Com.3.5.
    3 τοῦτο μέν.., τοῦτο δέ .. on the one hand.., on the other.., partly.., partly.., very freq. in Hdt., as 1.161, al.; τοῦτο μέν is sts. answered by δέ only, 4.76, S.Aj. 670, OC 440; by δὲ αὖ, Hdt.7.176; by ἔπειτα δέ, S.Ant.61; by ἀλλά, D.22.13; by εἶτα, S.Ph. 1345; by τοῦτ' αὖθις, Id.Ant. 165.
    4 dat. fem. ταύτῃ,
    a on this spot, here, ταύτῃ μὲν.., τῇδε δ' αὖ .. Id.Ph. 1331;

    ἀλλ' ἐὰν ταύτῃ γε νικᾷ, ταυτῃὶ πεπλήξεται Ar.Eq. 271

    , cf. Th. 1221.
    b in this point, herein,

    μηδὲν ταύτῃ γε κομήσῃς Id.Pl. 572

    , cf. X.Hier.7.12, etc.
    c in this way, thus, A.Pr. 191, S.OC 1300, etc.;

    οὐ.. ταῦτ' ἐστί πω ταύτῃ Ar.Eq. 843

    ;

    ἀλλ' οὔτι ταύτῃ ταῦτα E. Med. 365

    , cf. A.Pr. 511: antec. to ὥσπερ, Pl.R. 330c; to ὅπῃ, X.Cyr. 8.3.2;

    οὕτω τε καὶ ταύτῃ γίγνοιτο Pl.Lg. 681d

    ; καὶ οὕτω καὶ ταύτῃ ἂν ἔχοι ib. 714d; ταύτῃ καλεῖσθαι, etc., like οὕτω κ., Sch.Pl.Smp. 215b.
    5 ἐκ τούτου or τούτων thereupon, X.HG3.1.6, Oec.2.1; therefore, Id.An.3.3.5.
    b in the meantime, Hdt.1.126, Th.3.72, X.Mem.2.1.27.
    7 πρὸς τούτοις ([etym.] - οισι) besides, Hdt.2.51, Pl.Prt. 326a, X.Mem.2.4.4, Ar.Pl. 540.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > οὗτος

  • 25 στοιχεῖον

    I in a form of sun-dial, the shadow of the gnomon, the length of which in feet indicated the time of day, ὅταν ᾖ δεκάπουν τὸ ς. when the shadow is ten feet long, Ar.Ec. 652, v. Sch.;

    ὁπηνίκ' ἂν εἴκοσι ποδῶν.. τὸ σ. ᾖ Eub.119.7

    , cf. Philem.83.
    1 a simple sound of speech, as the first component of the syllable, Pl.Cra. 424d; τὸ ῥῶ τὸ ς. ib. 426d;

    γραμμάτων σ. καὶ συλλαβάς Id.Tht. 202e

    ;

    σ. ἐστι φωνὴ ἀδιαίρετος Arist.Po. 1456b22

    ;

    φωνῆς σ. καὶ ἀρχαὶ δοκοῦσιν εἶναι ταῦτ' ἐξ ὧν σύγκεινται αἱ φωναὶ πρώτων Id.Metaph. 998a23

    , cf.Gal.15.6:— στοιχεῖα therefore, strictly, were different from letters ([etym.] γράμματα), Diog.Bab.Stoic.3.213, Sch.D.T.p.32, al., but are freq. not clearly distd. from them, as by Pl.Tht.l.c., Cra. 426d;

    τὰ σ. τῶν γραμμάτων τὰ τέτταρα καὶ εἴκοσι Aen.Tact.31.21

    ; σ. ε ¯ letter ε (in a filing-system), BGU959.2 (ii A.D.); ἀκουόμενα ς. letters which are pronounced, A.D.Adv.165.17; γράμματα and ς. are expressly identified by D.T.630.32; the ς. and its name are confused by A.D. Synt.29.1, but distd. by Hdn.Gr. ap. Choerob.in Theod.1.340, Sch.D.T. l.c.:—

    κατὰ στοιχεῖον

     in the order of the letters, alphabetically,

    AP11.15

     (Ammian.); dub.sens.in Plu.2.422e.
    2 in Physics, στοιχεῖα were the components into which matter is ultimately divisible, elements, reduced to four by Empedocles, who called them ῥιζὤματα, the word στοιχεῖα being first used (acc. to Eudem. ap. Simp.in Ph.7.13 ) by Pl., τὰ πρῶτα οἱονπερεὶ ς, e)c w(=n h(mei=s te sugkei/meqa kai\ ta)/lla Tht. 201e; τὰ τῶν πάντων ς. Plt. 278d;

    αὐτὰ τιθέμενοι σ. τοῦ παντός Ti. 48b

    , cf. Arist.GC 314a29, Metaph. 998a28, Thphr.Sens.3, al., D.L.3.24;

    σ. σωματικά Arist.Mete. 338a22

    , Thphr.Fr.46; ἄτομα ς. Epicur.Ep.2p.36U.; equivalent to ἀρχαί, Thales ap.Plu.2.875c, Anaximand. ap. D.L.2.1, Anon. ap. Arist.Ph. 188b28, Metaph. 1059b23, al.; but Arist. also distinguishes ς. from ἀρχή as less comprehensive, ib.1070b23; τὰ σ. ὕλη τῆς οὐσίας ib.1088b27; τρία τὰ ς. Id.Ph. 189b16; distd. from ἀρχή on other grounds by Stoic.2.111; ς. used in three senses by Chrysipp., ib.136, cf. Zeno ib.1.24, al.; in Medicine, Gal.6.3, 420, al., 15.7, al.;

    Αἰθέρ, κόσμου σ. ἄριστον Orph.H.5.4

    ; ἀνηλεὲς ς., of the sea, Babr.71.4; τὸ ς., of the sea, Polem.Cyn.44; ἄμφω τὰ ς., i.e. land and sea, ib.11, cf. Hdn.3.1.5, Him.Ecl.2.18.
    3 the elements of proof, e.g. in general reasoning the πρῶτοι συλλογισμοί, Arist.Metaph. 1014b1; in Geometry, the propositions whose proof is involved in the proof of other propositions, ib. 998a26, 1014a36; title of geometrical works by Hippocrates of Chios, Leon, Theudios, and Euclid, Procl. in Euc.pp.66,67,68F.: hence applied to whatever is one, small, and capable of many uses, Arist.Metaph. 1014b3; to whatever is most universal, e.g. the unit and the point, ib.6; the line and the circle, Id.Top. 158b35; the τόπος (argument applicable to a variety of subjects), ib. 120b13, al., Rh. 1358a35, al.;

    στοιχεῖα τὰ γένη λέγουσί τινες Id.Metaph. 1014b10

    ; τὸ νόμισμα σ. καὶ πέρας τῆς ἀλλαγῆς coin is the unit.. of exchange, Id.Pol. 1257b23; in Grammar, σ. τῆς λέξεως parts of speech, D.H.Comp.2; but also, the letters composing a word, A.D.Synt.313.7; letters of the alphabet, Diog. Bab.Stoic.3.213; σ. τοῦ λόγου the elements of speech, viz. words, or the kinds of words, parts of speech, Thphr. ap. Simp. in Cat.10.24, Chrysipp.Stoic.2.45, A.D.Synt.7.1, 313.6.
    4 generally, elementary or fundamental principle, ἀρξάμενοι ἀπὸ τῶν ς. X.Mem.2.1.1;

    σ. χρηστῆς πολιτείας Isoc.2.16

    ; τὸ πολλάκις εἰρημένον μέγιστον ς. Arist.Pol. 1309b16;

    σ. τῆς ὅλης τέχνης Nicol.Com.1.30

    , cf. Epicur. Ep.1p.10U., Ep.3p.59U., Phld.Rh.1.127S., Gal.6.306.
    5 ἄστρων στοιχεῖα the stars, Man.4.624;

    σ. καυσούμενα λυθήσεται 2 Ep.Pet.3.10

    , cf. 12; esp. planets,

    στοιχείῳ Διός PLond.1.130.60

     (i/ii A.D.); so perh. in Ep.Gal.4.3, Ep.Col.2.8; esp. a sign of the Zodiac, D.L.6.102; of the Great Bear, PMag.Par.1.1303.
    6 σ. = ἀριθμός, as etym. of Στοιχαδεύς, Sch.D.T.p.192 H.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > στοιχεῖον

  • 26 υἱός

    υἱός, ὁ (written ϝηιός in
    A

    Ἀρχ. Ἐφ. 1931.103

     (Nemea, vi B. C.)), declined regul. υἱοῦ, υἱῷ, υἱόν, but in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. only after 350 B.C. (exc.

    υἱός IG12.529

    ,530, 598, 625; ὑός ib. 585, 828; ὑόνib.70.8), and then always so: —in earlier [dialect] Att. and other Inscrr. inflected as a [pron. full] ῠ- stem (like πῆχυς), nom. υἱύς (written huihus) Klein Vasen mit Meister-signaturen 72 (Brit.Mus.Cat. 701) (

    ὑύς IG12.571

    , 670, 686; [var] contr. ὕς ib.663); gen. υἱέος (

    ὑέος IG22.4883

    ); dat. υἱεῖ: dual

    υἱεῖ Lys.19.46

    , written ηυιε in IG12.775 (corrupted to υἱέε in Pl.Ap. 20a cod. B), υἱέοιν: pl. υἱεῖς (

    ὑεῖς IG12.115.14

    , al.), υἱέων, υἱέσι (S.Ant. 571, Ar. Nu. 1001 (anap.)), ὑέ[σιν] (IG12.54.14), υἱεῖς (

    ὑεῖς IG22.1.73

    ): but gen. υἱέως, and acc. υἱέα, υἱέας, which are formed as though from nom. Υἱεύς, are rejected by Phryn.48,49, Thom.Mag.p.367 R., as not [dialect] Att., though the two latter forms are used by later writers (as

    υἱέα Euph. 5

    , Arr.Cyn.16,

    ὑέα IG42(1).244.4

     (Epid., ii B. C.), but υἱέως is f. l. in Th.1.13, J.AJ18.2.4, etc.): dat. pl. υἱεῦσιν is mentioned as a form that would be regular by Eust.1348.27:—Homer uses nom. υἱός (very freq.); gen. υἱοῦ only in Od.22.238, elsewh. υἱέος; dat. υἱέϊ or υἱεῖ; acc.

    υἱέα Il.13.350

     (cf. IGRom.4.360.29 (Pergam., hex.)), elsewh. υἱόν (very freq.): pl., nom.

    υἱέες Il.5.10

    , al., or

    υἱεῖς Od.15.248

    , 24.387, 497; gen.

    υἱῶν Il.21.587

    , 22.44, Od.24.223; dat. υἱοῖσι ([etym.] ν ) only Od.19.418, υἱάσι ([etym.] ν) Il.5.463, al. (never υἱέσι); acc. υἱέας ib. 149, al.:— he also uses the shorter forms, gen. υἷος, υἷι, υἷα, dual υἷε (distd. from the voc. sg. υἱέ by the accent), pl. υἷες, υἷας; but these were confined to [dialect] Ep.: their accentuation (in which codd. agree with Hdn.Gr.1.409) may preserve a trace of their Aeolic origin (v. infr.). The declension υἱῆος, υἱῆϊ, υἱῆα, υἱῆες, υἱήεσσι, υἱῆας (like βασιλῆος, etc., as though from Υἱεύς), belongs solely to later [dialect] Ep. poets, as A.R.2.1093, 1119, Nic.Fr.110, AP9.23 (Antip.), etc. Dialect Inscrr. have the foll. archaic forms, nom.

    υἱύς IG5

     (1).720 ([dialect] Lacon.), Leg.Gort.12.17 ( υιυις lapis); acc.

    υἱύν Inscr.Olymp.30

    , Leg.Gort.10.15; gen. υἱέος ib.6.3, Schwyzer 105 (Methana, vi B. C.); but

    υἱοῦ IG9(1).867

     (Corc., vii B. C.); nom. pl.

    υἱέες Leg.Gort.7.25

    ; acc. pl. υἱύνς ib. 4.40, IG12.407 (Cret. or Argive); dat. pl.

    υἱάσι Leg.Gort.4.37

     (as in Hom., influenced by θυγατράσι, πατράσι, which have ρα = ṛ, cf. Skt. pitṛ[snull ]u);

    ὑέεσσι IG14.10

     (Syrac.); υἷος in SIG55 (Thessaly, v B. C.) is perh. the [dialect] Aeol. gen. ( ὑός is nom. rather than gen. in IG12.828); acc.

    ὗα Schwyzer 625

     (Mytil., ii/i B. C.); a nom. ὑϊς (scanned - ?υἱόςX) IG12.472 (Boeotia, vi B. C.), cf. Simon.249 (v. infr.); nom. pl.

    ὗες IG22.3632.24

     (hex., Eleusis, ii A. D.). The initial syll. is both υἱ- and ὑ- in [dialect] Att. Inscrr. down to 400 B.C. (e. g.

    ὑεῖς IG12.115.14

    , ὑέ[σιν] ib.54.14, ὑόν v. supr.), afterwards ὑ-, but υἱός reappears under the Empire; in Plato cod. A usually has ὑιος, which is found also in T, cod. B always has υἱός, editors restore ὑός; acc. υἱόν is recommended by Phryn. l. c.; in Inscrr. of Pergamon, Magnesia, and Delphi, and in non-literary Papyri, ὑός is at all times less common than υἱός:— ὁ υεἱός CIG (add.) 3857p; dat. υεἱῷ ib.3846z82 (both Phrygia), cf. BCH11.471:—son, Il.6.366, etc.; υἱὸν ποιεῖσθαί τινα to adopt as a son, Aeschin.2.28; υἱεῖς ἄνδρες grown-up sons, D. 25.88: metaph., Κόρον Ὕβριος υἱόν Orac. ap. Hdt.8.77: rarely of animals, Ev.Matt.21.5.
    2 periphr., υἷες Ἀχαιῶν, for Ἀχαιοί, Il. 1.162, al.; cf.

    παῖς 1.3

    .
    3 generally, child, and so υἱ. ἄρρην male child, Apoc.12.5, PSI9.1039.36 (iii A. D.).
    4 freq. in LXX in periphrases (Hebraisms with various meanings),

    υἱὸς ἐτῶν ἑκατόν 100

     years old, Ge.11.10, al.;

    υἱοὶ ἀδικίας 2 Ki.7.10

    ;

    υἱοὶ θανατώσεως 1 Ki. 26.16

    ;

    υἱοὶ τῶν συμμίζεων

     hostages,

    4 Ki.14.14

    ; so

    υἱὸς εἰρήνης Ev.Luc.10.6

    .
    5 in some dialects, including the [dialect] Ion. Prose of Hdt., υἱός is replaced by παῖς: υἱός is rare in Trag., A.Th. 609, Fr. 320, E.Or. 1689 (anap.), al., and 7 times in S.: Hom. has both words in this sense.
    6 as a general term of affection, PGiss.68.2 (ii A. D.), POxy.1219.2 (iii A. D.); υἱέ, an author's address to the reader, LXX Pr.1.8, al.
    7 δάμου υἱός, υἱὸς πόλεως, Ἑλλάδος, as titles of honour, SIG804.10 (Cos, i A. D.), 813A,B (Delph., i A. D.), 854 (Eleusis, i A. D.).
    8 υἱοὶ ἀνθρώπων sons of men, periphr. for men (cf. supr. 2,4), LXXPs.89(90).3; οἱ υἱοὶ τῶν ἀ. ib.Ge.11.5, Ev.Marc.3.28;

    υἱὸς ἀνθρώπου

     man,

    LXXEz.2.1

    ,3, al.; of the Messiah, ib.Da.7.13, Apoc.14.14; used by Jesus of himself, Ev.Matt.8.20, al. (by Stephen recalling the words of Jesus, Act.Ap.7.56).
    9 υἱοὶ Θεοῦ sons of God, implying inheritors of the nature of God (cf. supr. 4), Ev.Matt.5.9, cf. 45, Ev.Luc.6.35; implying participants in the glory of God, ib.20.36.
    b of Jesus, τὸ γεννώμενον κληθήσεται υἱὸς Θεοῦ ib. 1.35; ὁ Χριστός, ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ, Ev.Matt.26.63, cf.Ev.Jo.1.34.
    c Θεοῦ υἱός, = Lat. Divi (sc. Caesaris) filius, patronymic of Augustus, BGU543.3 (27 B.C.), PTeb.382.21 (i B. C.), IG12(3).174.2 (Epist. ad Cnidios, 5 A. D.). [Hom.sts. has the first syll. short in nom., voc. and acc. sg.,

    οὐδὲ Δρύαντος υἱός Il.6.130

    ;

    Ἀμφιτρύωνος υἱός Od.11.270

    ;

    Ποδῆς υἱὸς Ἠετίωνος Il.17.575

    , cf. 590;

    Ἀνθεμίωνος υἱόν 4.473

    ;

    Σελάγου υἱόν 5.612

    ;

    Ἕκτορ, υἱὲ Πριάμοιο 7.47

    ; and Πηλῆος υἱός, Μηκιστῆος υἱός seem to be the better readings in 1.489, 2.566: in these places some other form ought perh. to be restored, but none of the known forms has a short [pron. full] ῠ: ὑός has [pron. full] ῡ in IG12.585 (vi B. C.), 828 (v B. C.), 2.2338, 22.4319 (both iv B. C.); Simon.l.c. seems to have used a monosyll. nom. υἷς, and Hdn.Gr. may have read it as ὕις ([etym.] ?υἱόςX?υἱόςX), but this is uncertain, as in Sch.Il.5.266 he seems to say that ὕις ( υἷις cod.) does not occur.] (Prob. from *sū-yú-s, cf. Skt. sūte 'procreate', Tocharian (A-dial.) se, (B-dial.) soyä 'son'; different suffix in *sū-nu-s, Skt. sūnūs, etc., and in *s[ucaron]-nu-s, OE. sunu, etc. (all = son); *sūyú- perh. became *s[ucaron]wyú-, then *suiwú-; υἱός and υἱόν perh. by dissimilation from υἱύς υἱύν, since the o-stem forms appear first where υ-υ would otherwise be repeated; ὗϊς ([etym.] ὑΐς) may be another dissimilation; the precise origin of υἷος υἷι υἷες etc. is uncertain.)

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > υἱός

  • 27 βδελυρός

    Grammatical information: adj.
    Meaning: `disgusting, loathsome' (Ar.)
    Derivatives: βδελύσσομαι (- ττ-), fut. βδελύξομαι `feel a loathing' (Hp.), act. - ύσσω, - ύττω (LXX) with βδελυγμία (Cratin.) etc. Vb. adj. βδελυκτός ( βδελύκτροπος from *βδελυκτο-τροπος A.). PN Βδελυ-κλέων (Ar.). βδελυχρός (Epich.)
    Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]
    Etymology: βδελυρός is mostly explained as formed from βδέ-ω with a λυ-suffix (as in θῆ-λυ-ς), but this is hardly possible. A verb in - εω does not give a stem in -ε to which suffixes can be added. Then, a suffix - λυ- probably does not exist: θῆλυς seems rather built on an λ-stem (DELG, Frisk); and - λυ- was certainly no longer productive (Chantr. Form. 121). Here an λ-suffix was seen in βδέλλων τρέμων η βδέων, βδέλεσθαι κοιλιολυτεῖν H. (forms which are doubted) and in βδόλος `stench' (Com. Adesp. 781; cf. γαλεόβδολον, s. γαλέη). But these form are as difficult: there was no stem βδε- to which a suffix could be added. Also, it seems not clear from the meaning that βδελυρός was derived from βδέω (in H. forms are often explained with μισέω): that later the verb influenced by the meaning is easy to understand. Therefore the word cannot be explained as a Greek formation. It then seems probable to analyse βδελ-υρ-, both components of which are prob. Pre-Greek: βδ- and the suffix - υρ- (s. Beekes, Pre-Greek).
    Page in Frisk: 1,229-230

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > βδελυρός

  • 28 φθορά

    φθορά, ᾶς, ἡ (Aeschyl., Hdt.+; ins, pap, LXX, En; PsSol 4:6; SibOr 2, 9; Philo; Jos., Ant. 18, 373; Mel., P. 49, 351; Ath., R. 16 p. 67, 24 al.)
    ① breakdown of organic matter, dissolution, deterioration, corruption, in the world of nature (Galen, In Hippocr. De Natura Hominis Comm. 45 p. 25, 6 Mewaldt γένεσις κ. φθορά=coming into being and passing away; 51 p. 28, 11 γένεσις κ. φθορὰ σώματος.—The cause of destruction is made clear by an addition. Cp. Plut., Artox. 1019 [16, 6] concerning Mithridates, who was allowed to decompose while he was still alive: εὐλαὶ κ. σκώληκες ὑπὸ φθορᾶς κ. σηπεδόνος ἀναζέουσιν=maggots and worms swarmed as a result of the destruction and putrefaction [of his body]) τροφὴ φθορᾶς perishable food IRo 7:3. ἅ ἐστιν πάντα εἰς φθορὰν τῇ ἀποχρήσει all of which are meant for destruction by being consumed Col 2:22. Of animals who are destined to be killed 2 Pt 2:12a (X., Cyr. 7, 5, 64; Artem. 1, 78 p. 74, 27.—Schol. on Nicander, Ther. 795 explains κακόφθορα by saying that it designates animals τὰ ἐπὶ κακῇ φθορᾷ τεχθέντα=born to come to an evil end, i.e. destruction).—Of the state of being perishable (opp. ἀφθαρσία as Philo, Mos. 2, 194; Mel., Ath.) 1 Cor 15:42; also concrete, that which is perishable vs. 50. ἡ δουλεία τῆς φθορᾶς slavery to decay Ro 8:21. [ἀπ]ὸ φθορᾶς γεγ[ονός] that which comes from the perishable Ox 1081 13f (=Coptic SJCh 89, 11f; the restoration φθορᾶς pap ln. 12 also corresponds to the Coptic version; for the correct restoration of pap ln. 23 s. under διαφορά).
    ② destruction of a fetus, abortion (cp. SIG 1042, 7 [II/III A.D.] φθορά=miscarriage [which makes the mother unclean for 40 days] and φθόριον=a means of producing abortion) οὐ φονεύσεις ἐν φθορᾷ B 19:5; D 2:2.—On the topic of abortion s. Soranus, Gyn. 64f (procedures); Plut., Mor. 242c (διαφθείρω); SDickison, Abortion in Antiquity: Arethusa 6, ’73, 159–66.
    ③ ruination of a pers. through an immoral act, seduction of a young woman (Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 9 Jac.; Diod S 3, 59, 1; 5, 62, 1; Plut., Mor. 712c; Jos., Ant. 17, 309, C. Ap. 2, 202) w. μοιχεία (Philo, Det. Pot. Ins. 102) 2 Cl 6:4.
    ④ inward depravity, depravity (Ex 18:18; Mi 2:10) ἡ ἐν τῷ κόσμῳ ἐν ἐπιθυμίᾳ φθορά the depravity that exists in the world because of inordinate desire (opp. θεία φύσις) 2 Pt 1:4. δοῦλοι τῆς φθορᾶς 2:19. Vs. 12b (s. 5 below) scarcely belongs here.
    ⑤ total destruction of an entity, destruction in the last days Gal 6:8 (opp. ζωὴ αἰώνιος). ἐν τῇ φθορᾷ αὐτῶν καὶ φθαρήσονται when they (the dumb animals) are destroyed in the coming end of the world, these (the false teachers), too, will be destroyed (so BWeiss, Kühl, JMayor, Windisch, Knopf, Vrede) 2 Pt 2:12b.—DELG s.v. θείρω. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > φθορά

  • 29 ὑπόκειμαι

    ὑπόκειμαι, used as [voice] Pass. of ὑποτίθημι, [tense] fut. ὑποκείσομαι Pi.O.1.85, etc., but [tense] aor. ὑπετέθην:—
    A lie under,

    ὑπὸ δὲ ξύλα κεῖται Il.21.364

    ;

    θεμέλιοι ὑ. Th.1.93

    ;

    τὸν μηρὸν ὑποκείμενον ἔχειν Arist.IA 712b32

    , cf. PA 686a13, 689b18: c. dat.,

    τοιαύτης τῆς κρηπῖδος ὑποκειμένης ταῖς πολιτείαις Pl.Plt. 301e

    : τὰ ὑποκείμενα, opp. τὰ ὑπερκείμενα, Sor.1.8.
    2 of places, lie close to,

    ὑποκειμένης τῆς Εὐβοίας ὑπὸ τὴν Ἀττικήν Isoc. 4.108

    ;

    ὑ. τὸ πεδίον τῷ ἱερῷ Aeschin.3.118

    ;

    λόφος ὑποκείμενος τοῖς Σιννάκοις Plu.Crass.29

    ;

    τὸ τὴν οἰκουμένην ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς τοῦτον τὸν τόπον Arist.Mete. 364a7

    , cf.Pr. 941b39;

    <τὰ> πρὸς βορρᾶν καὶ ἄρκτον ὑποκείμενα μέρη τῶν ὀρέων Gp.2.5.1

    ; τὰ ὑποκείμενα ἐδάφη the adjacent soil, D.S.3.50; ἡ-κειμένη χώρα the adjacent country, ibid. (but, the adjacent low lands, Id.2.37, Plu.Sert.17);

    ὄρος ὑπόκειται Plb.5.59.4

     codd. ( ἐπίκ- Schweigh.);

    ὁ ὑποκείμενος ποταμός Id.3.74.2

    ; ὑποκεῖσθαι πρὸς τὴν ο?ὑπόκειμαιXψιν to be presented to the sight, Demetr.Lac.Herc.1013.17.
    3 to be given below in the text,

    κατὰ τὴν.. συγγραφήν, ἧς τὸ ἀντίγραφον ὑπόκειται PCair.Zen.355.122

     (iii B. C.); γράψον.. τοὺς χαρακτῆρας ὡς ὑπόκειται as below, PMag.Par.1.408; λέγε τὸν λόγον τὸν ὑποκείμενον ib.230; ὡς ὑπόκειται as below, Sammelb.5231.11 (i A. D.), etc.; also, as set forth, PKlein.Form.78 (v/vi A. D.).
    II in various metaph. senses,
    1 to be established, set before one (by oneself or another) as an aim or principle, ἐμοὶ μὲν οὗτος ἄεθλος ὑποκείσεται shall be my appointed task, Pi. l. c.; δυοῖν ὑποκειμένοιν ὀνομάτοιν two phrases being prescribed, having legal sanction, D.23.36; ὑπόκειται πρῶτον μὲν διωμοσία, δεύτερον δὲ λόγος the prescribed course is.., ib.71; μένειν ἐπὶ τῶν ὑποκειμένων to abide by one's resolves, Plb.1.19.6, 2.51.1;

    μένειν ἐπὶ τῆς ὑ. γνώμης Id.1.40.5

    ; ἐμοὶ ὑπόκειται ὅτι .. for me it is a fixed principle that.., Hdt.2.123, cf. Arist.Oec. 1343b9;

    νομίζω συμφέρειν.. τοῦθ' ὑποκεῖσθαι D.14.3

    ; τῶν πραγμάτων ἐν οἷς τὰ ὑποκείμενα διαφέρει τῷ εἴδει things of which the principles differ in kind, Arist.Pol. 1275a35; τὰς ὑποκειμένας μοίρας τξ the conventional 3600, Ptol.Alm.5.1.
    2 to be assumed as a hypothesis (cf.

    ὑπόθεσις 111

    ), Pl.Cra. 436d, al.; ὑπέκειτο μὴ οἷόν τε εἶναι .. Id.Erx. 404b;

    τούτων ὑποκειμένων Id.Prt. 359a

    , R. 478e; τὴν ἐκ τῶν -κειμένων ἀρίστην [πολιτείαν] the best (possible) in the circumstances, opp. to τὴν κρατίστην ἁπλῶς and to τὴν ἐξ ὑποθέσεως, Arist. Pol. 1288b26;

    ὑποκείσθω τι

     let it be taken for granted,

    Id.EN 1103b32

    , cf. 1129a11, al., Gal.15.175; ὑποκείσθω ὅτι .. let it be taken for granted that.., Arist.Pol. 1323b40;

    ὑ. εἶναι τὴν ἡδονὴν κίνησιν Id.Rh. 1369b33

    : so with a nom., ὑ. ἡ ἀρετὴ εἶναι .. Id.EN 1104b27, cf. Rh. 1357a11: c. part.,

    τοιόνδε ζῷον ὑ. ὄν Id.GA 778b17

    : without any Verb, ἡ τοῦ δέρματος φύσις ὑ. γεώδης (sc. εἶναι or οὖσα) ib. 782a29, etc.: cf. ὑποτίθημι IV. 1.
    4 to be in prospect,

    ἐλπὶς ὑπόκειται σφαλεῖσι κἂν αὐτοὺς διασῴζεσθαι Th.3.84

    ;

    αἱ ὑποκείμεναι προσδοκίαι καὶ αἱ ἐλπίδες D.19.24

    ; παρ' ὑμῖν ὀργὴ μεγάλη καὶ τιμωρία ὑπόκειται τοῖς τὰ ψευδῆ μαρτυροῦσι is reserved for them, Id.34.19, cf. Lycurg.130; δυοῖν κινδύνοιν -κειμένοιν ibid.;

    ὁρᾶν τὸν θάνατον ὑποκείμενον PPetr.3p.73

     (iii B. C.);

    φόβου ὑποκειμένου ὅτι οἴσει τι βέβαιον παρὰ σοῦ PSI4.380.3

     (iii B. C.);

    τοῦτο καὶ τοῖς μηθὲν ἀσεβὲς ἐπιτελεσαμένοις κατὰ τοὺς τοῦ πολέμου νόμους ὑπόκειται παθεῖν Plb.2.58.10

    .
    5 to be subject to, submit to,

    τῷ ἄρχοντι Pl.Grg. 510c

    ;

    βασιλεῖ Philostr. VA3.20

    ;

    πατράσιν POxy. 237 vii 16

     (ii A. D.);

    ἐξετάσεσιν PFlor.33.14

     (iv A. D.);

    βασάνοις POxy.58.25

     (iii A. D.): abs., pay court to one,

    ὑποκείσονται δεόμενοι καὶ τιμῶντες Pl.R. 494c

    ; τῷ λόγῳ to be captivated by the story, Philostr.VA6.14;

    θρῆνοι -κείμενοι

     subdued,

    Id.VS2.4.2

    .
    6 to be subject to, liable to a penalty, Supp.Epigr.6.424, cf. 415,421, al. ([place name] Iconium), PLond.1.77.53 (vi A. D.): also c. acc.,

    ὑποκείσεται τῷ φίσκῳ δηνάρια πεντακόσια Rev.Phil.36.61

     ([place name] Iconium).
    7 to be pledged or mortgaged, c. gen., for a certain sum, Is.6.33, D.49.11,35;

    ναῦς ὑποκειμένη ἡμῖν Id.56.4

    ; τὰ ὑποκείμενα the articles pledged, Syngr. ap.D.35.12; the mortgaged property, SIG1044.28 (Halic., iv/iii B. C.);

    ἐνέχυρα-κείμενα IG12(7).58

     ([place name] Amorgos); ὑποκείμενοι, of slaves pledged for a sum of money, D.27.9.
    b of payments, to have been granted or allocated, ἀποφαίνουσιν ὑποκεῖσθαι ἐν τῇ γραφῇ τῶν εἰς τὰ ἱερὰ (sc. ὑποκειμένων)

    δίδοσθαι κτλ. UPZ21.4

     (ii B. C.), cf. 23.21 (ii B. C.), BGU 1197.4, 1200.28 (both i B. C.): Subst. ὑποκείμενα, τά, = φιλάνθρωπα, salary ( ear-marked proceeds of taxes),

    τὰ ἐπιβάλλοντά μοι ἐκ τοῦ ἱεροῦ ὑ. PLond.2.357.9

    , cf. 5 (i A. D.);

    ὑ. αἰτεῖ ἀπὸ τῶν κωμῶν BGU23.12

     (ii/iii A. D.), cf. OGI665.19,26 (Egypt, i A. D.): c. dat., as part of name of specific taxes,

    ὑ. βασιλικῇ γραμματείᾳ

     ear-marked for the benefit of..,

    PPar.17.22

     (ii A. D.);

    ὑ. τοπογραμματείᾳ PSI1.101.18

     (ii A. D.), cf. POxy.1436.23 (ii A. D.), etc.: also in sg.,

    ὑποκείμενον ἐπιστρατηγία BGU 199.14

     (ii A. D.), cf. PFlor.375.22 (ii A. D.), etc.: also c. gen.,

    ὑ. ἐννομίου PRyl.213.72

    , al. (ii A. D.); τοπαρχίας ib.73, etc.
    8 in Philosophy, to underlie, as the foundation in which something else inheres, to be implied or presupposed by something else,

    ἑκάστῳ τῶν ὀνομάτων.. ὑ. τις ἴδιος οὐσία Pl.Prt. 349b

    , cf. Cra. 422d, R. 581c, Ti.Locr.97e: τὸ ὑποκείμενον has three main applications: (1) to the matter which underlies the form, opp. εἶδος, ἐντελέχεια, Arist.Metaph. 983a30; (2) to the substance (matter + form) which underlies the accidents, opp. πάθη, συμβεβηκότα, Id.Cat. 1a20,27, Metaph. 1037b16, 983b16; (3) to the logical subject to which attributes are ascribed, opp. τὸ κατηγορούμενον, Id.Cat. 1b10,21, Ph. 189a31: applications (1 ) and (2 ) are distinguished in Id.Metaph. 1038b5, 1029a1-5, 1042a26-31: τὸ ὑ. is occasionally used of what underlies or is presupposed in some other way, e. g. of the positive termini presupposed by change, Id.Ph. 225a3-7.
    b exist, τὸ ἐκτὸς ὑποκείμενον the external reality, Stoic.2.48, cf. Epicur.Ep.1pp.12,24 U.;

    φῶς εἶναι τὸ χρῶμα τοῖς ὑ. ἐπιπῖπτον Aristarch.

     Sam. ap. Placit.1.15.5;

    τὸ κρῖνον τί τε φαίνεται μόνον καὶ τί σὺν τῷ φαίνεσθαι ἔτι καὶ κατ' ἀλήθειαν ὑπόκειται S.E.M.7.143

    , cf. 83,90,91, 10.240; = ὑπάρχω, τὰ ὑποκείμενα πράγματα the existing state of affairs, Plb.11.28.2, cf. 11.29.1, 15.8.11,13, 3.31.6, Eun.VSp.474 B.;

    Τίτος ἐξ ὑποκειμένων ἐνίκα, χρώμενος ὁπλις μοῖς καὶ τάξεσιν αἷς παρέλαβε Plu.Comp.Phil.Flam.2

    ;

    τῆς αὐτῆς δυνάμεως ὑποκειμένης Id.2.336b

    ;

    ἐχομένου τοῦ προσιόντος λόγου ὡς πρὸς τὸν ὑποκείμενον A.D.Synt.122.17

    .
    c ὁ ὑ. ἐνιαυτός the year in question, D.S.11.75; οἱ ὑ. καιροί the time in question, Id.16.40, Plb.2.63.6, cf. Plu.Comp.Sol.Publ.4; τοῦ ὑ. μηνός the current month, PTeb.14.14 (ii B. C.), al.; ἐκ τοῦ ὑ. φόρου in return for a reduction from the said rent, PCair.Zen.649.18 (iii B. C.); πρὸς τὸ ὑ. νόει according to the context, Gp.6.11.7.
    9 in logical arrangement, to be subject or subordinate,

    τῇ.. ἰατρικῇ.. ἡ ὀψοποιικὴ.. ὑ. Pl. Grg. 465b

    ;

    ὁ τὴν καθόλου ἐπιστήμην ἔχων οἶδέ πως πάντα τὰ ὑποκείμενα Arist.Metaph. 982a23

    , cf. APo. 91a11;

    ἑκάστη [τέχνη] περὶ τὸ αὐτῇ ὑ. ἐστι διδασκαλική Id.Rh. 1355b28

    .
    b ἡ ὑ. ὕλη the subject-matter of a science or treatise, Id.EN 1094b12, 1098a28, Phld.Po.Herc.1676.3 (pl.); τὸ ὑ. the part affected by a disease, Plb.1.81.6.
    III trans., = ὑποτέθειμαι, I have appended,

    ὧν τὸ καθ' ἓν ὑπόκειμαι PTeb. 140

     (i B. C.); cf. παράκειμαι ([place name] Addenda).

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ὑπόκειμαι

  • 30 ἄλοξ

    ἄλοξ, - κος
    Grammatical information: f.
    Meaning: `furrow' (Trag., Com.).
    Other forms: Also αὖλαξ (Hes.), ὦλκα, - ας acc. sg., pl. (Hom.), Dor. ὦλαξ EM 625, 37and in ὁμ-ώλακες (A. R. 2, 396). Further εὑλάκᾱ `plough' with the Lacon. fut. inf. εὑλαξεῖν (Orac. ap. Th. 5, 16); and αὑλάχα ἡ ὕννις H. and *ὄλοκες (cod. ὀλοκεύς) αὔλακες H.
    Origin: PG [a word of Pre-Greek origin]
    Etymology: The relation between these forms was unclear. Solmsen Unt. 258ff. explained ὦλκα from *ἄϜολκα ( κατὰ ὦλκα Ν 707 for original *κατ' ἄϜολκα); it is strange that this form did not live on. Beside *ἀ-Ϝολκ- the zero grade would give *ἀ-Ϝλακ- in αὖλαξ. The root was supposed in Lith. velkù, OCS vlěkǫ, Av. varǝk- `draw'; one could assume * h₂uelk-. This is tempting, but must not be correct. If the Balto-Slavic words are isolated (there is further only Av. vǝrǝc-), the verb may be non-IE; also it is rather * uelkʷ-, which makes the connection with Greek impossible; further there is no trace of the verb in Greek, which has ἔλκω \< *selk-. εὑλάκα can no longer be explained from different prothesis, *ἐ-Ϝλακ-. But ἄλοξ cannot be explained in this way: metathesis of *αϜολκ- would give *αυλοκ-; an after the F had disappeared, metathesis was no longer possible (only contraction to *ωλκ-). - I see no reason to reject ὀλοκ-. ὦλαξ was perhaps taken from a compound, like ὁμώλακ-, which would give *ολακ-. - Pisani JF 53, 29 derived αὖλαξ from αὑλός and separated it from ἄλοξ etc., which is improbable. - The variants are strongly reminiscent of substr. words, as Beekes Dev. 40 held (withdrawn ib. 275-7). Variation of prothetic ε\/α\/ο\/αυ\/ευ is typical of substr. words, as is κ\/χ ( αὐλάχα). So more probably we have to assume a substr. word. The start with the Homeric form was wrong: it is the only form that has no vowel between λ and κ, and is therefore suspect. If we assume labialised phonemes, like lʷ, a reconstruction * alʷak- gives all forms: αὖλαξ (by anticipation of the labial feature; which gives ὦλαξ by contraction), ἄλοξ (influence on the second vowel ; ὀλοκ- on both vowels), interchange α\/ε gave εὐλακ-; see Beekes Pre-Gr., and cf. ἀρασχάδες etc. Homer might have had *κατ' ὠλακ(α), which became unclear during the tradition.
    Page in Frisk: 1,77

    Greek-English etymological dictionary (Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά ετυμολογική λεξικό) > ἄλοξ

  • 31 εἰ

    1
    εἰ (Hom.+)
    ① marker of a condition, existing in fact or hypothetical, if (B-D-F §371f, neg. §428, 1; 2; Rob., indexes; JBoyer, Grace Theological Journal 2, ’81, 75–141, marker of a ‘simple, logical connection between protasis and apodosis’).
    ⓐ w. the indic.
    α. in all tenses, to express a condition thought of as real or to denote assumptions relating to what has already happened εἰ υἱὸς εἶ τοῦ θεοῦ if you really are the Son of God Mt 4:3; sim. 5:29f; 6:23; 8:31; Ac 5:39. εἰ σὺ Ἰουδαῖος ἐπονομάζῃ if you call yourself a Judean Ro 2:17. εἰ κατακαυχᾶσαι, οὐ σὺ βαστάζεις if you do boast, (remember) you do not support 11:18 al. In Paul the verb is freq. missing, and is to be supplied fr. the context: εἰ Χριστὸς ἐν ὑμῖν (sc. ἐστιν), τὸ μὲν σῶμα νεκρόν (sc. ἐστιν) 8:10. εἰ τέκνα (sc. ἐστέ) if you are children, then … vs. 17, εἰ χάριτι (γέγονεν), οὐκέτι ἐξ ἔργων 11:6 al. The negative in clauses where the reality of the condition is taken for granted is οὐ (earlier Gk. μή [for exception s. Goodwin p. 138f]; s. B-D-F §428, 1): εἰ οὐ δύναται τοῦτο παρελθεῖν Mt 26:42. εἰ δὲ ὑμεῖς οὐκ ἀφίετε Mk 11:25 [26] v.l. εἰ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε Lk 16:11f; εἰ οὐκ ἀκούουσιν vs. 31. εἰ οὐ φοβοῦμαι Lk 18:4; cp. J 5:47; 10:37; Ro 8:9; 11:21; 1 Cor 7:9; 9:2; 11:6; 15:13ff, 29, 32; 16:22 al. εἰ is rarely found w. the future εἰ πάντες σκανδαλισθήσονται Mt 26:33; Mk 14:29; εἰ ἀρνησόμεθα 2 Ti 2:12 (cp. Just., A I, 31, 6 εἰ μὴ ἀρνοῖντο Ἰησοῦν); εἰ ὑπομενεῖτε 1 Pt 2:20; εἰ καὶ οὐ δώσει (class. ἐὰν καὶ μὴ δῷ B-D-F §372, 3; Rob. 1012) Lk 11:8. W. aor., when events are regarded as having taken place Mt 24:22; Mk 3:26; 13:20.
    β. w. the pres., impf., aor., or plpf. indic. to express an unreal (contrary to fact) condition (B-D-F §360; 372; Rob. 1012ff). ἄν is usu. found in the apodosis (regularly in class.) εἰ ἐν Τύρῳ καὶ Σίδωνι ἐγένοντο αἱ δυνάμεις, πάλαι ἂν μετενόησαν if the wonders had been done in T. and S., they would have repented long ago Mt 11:21. εἰ ἤμεθα ἐν ταῖς ἡμέραις τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν if we had lived in the days of our fathers 23:30. εἰ ᾔδει ὁ οἰκοδεσπότης if the master of the house had known 24:43 (cp. Just., A I, 12, 2 εἰ … ταῦτα ἐγίνωσκον; 18, 1 al.) εἰ ἦν προφήτης, ἐγίνωσκεν ἄν if he were a prophet, he would know Lk 7:39 al. The pres. indic. εἰ ἔχετε (v.l. εἴχετε) πίστιν … ἐλέγετε ἄν if you had faith … you would say Lk 17:6. Somet. ἄν is lacking in the apodosis (Polyaenus 2, 3, 5 εἰ ἐπεποιήκειμεν … νῦν ἐχρῆν=if we had done … it would have been necessary; Mitt-Wilck. II/2, 16, 18 [II B.C.]; PRein I, 7 [II B.C.]; POxy 526, 10; 530, 8 and 17; Just., A I, 10, 6; 11:2 al.—PMelcher, De sermone Epict., diss. Halle 1905, 75; Mlt. 200f) εἰ μὴ ἦν οὗτος παρὰ θεοῦ, οὐκ ἠδύνατο if this man were not from God, he would not have been able to … J 9:33. εἰ μὴ ἦλθον, ἁμαρτίαν οὐκ εἴχοσαν if I had not come, they would not have sin 15:22; cp. vs. 24. W. the apodosis placed first Mk 9:42 (v.l. περιέκειτο), Lk 17:2; J 19:11.
    ⓑ εἰ w. subj., as καὶ εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 (s. 7 below), is unusual, perh. a textual error; B-D-F §372, 3 conjectures κἄν for καὶ εἰ. But εἰ w. subj. is found in the older poets and Hdt. (Kühner-G. II 474), in Aristoph., Equ. 698 et al., in var. dialects (EHermann, Griech. Forschungen I 1912, 277f) and in later times (e.g. Epict., Vett. Val., Lucian [ed. CJacobitz, Index graec. 473a]; Philostrat., Vi. Apoll. p. 84, 28; 197, 9; ins [Rdm.2 199]; PRyl 234, 12; POxy 496, 11; Dt 8:5); B-D-F §372, 3; Mlt. 187; Reinhold 107; OSchulthess, AKaegi Festschr. 1919, 161f.
    ⓒ εἰ w. the optative is rare: εἰ καὶ πάσχοιτε … μακάριοι even if you should suffer, … you would be blessed 1 Pt 3:14. εἰ θέλοι (v.l. θέλει) τὸ θέλημα τοῦ θεοῦ if it should be God’s will vs. 17. εἴ τι ἔχοιεν (sc. κατηγορεῖν; cp. Just., A I, 3, 1 εἰ … μηδὲν ἔχοι τις ἐλέγχειν) πρὸς ἐμέ if they should have any charges to bring against me Ac 24:19. εἰ δυνατὸν εἴη (Jos., Ant. 12, 12) if it should be possible 20:16 (but s. B-D-F §385, 2; Just., A II, 15, 2 εἰ δύναιντο). εἰ τύχοι is used as a formula (oft. in later wr., incl. Philo; s. KReik, D. Opt. bei Polyb. u. Philo 1907, 154; Just., A I, 27, 3) it may be, for example, perhaps 1 Cor 15:37; used to tone down an assertion which may be too bold 14:10 (Lucian, Icar. 6 καὶ πολλάκις, εἰ τύχοι, μηδὲ ὁπόσοι στάδιοι Μεγαρόθεν Ἀθήναζέ εἰσιν, ἀκριβῶς ἐπιστάμενοι ‘and many times, so it appears, not even knowing how many stades it is from Megara to Athens’).
    ② marker of an indirect question as content, that (Kühner-G. II 369, 8; Rob. 965. Cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 67 §283 ἀγανακτέω εἰ=be exasperated that; Sir 23:14 θελήσεις εἰ μὴ ἐγεννήθης; 2 Macc 14:28; 4 Macc 2:1; 4:7. S. on θαυμάζω 1aγ) ἐθαύμασεν εἰ ἤδη τέθνηκεν he was surprised that he was already dead Mk 15:44a. μὴ θαυμάζετε εἰ μισεῖ ὑμᾶς ὁ κόσμος do not wonder that the world hates you 1J 3:13; θαυμαζόντων …, εἰ τοσαύτη σπουδὴ ἦν τοῦ συλληφθῆναι that there was such interest in arresting MPol 7:2; AcPlCor 2:2 (cp. Just., A II, 8, 3 οὐδὲν … θαυμαστόν, εἰ). Sim. also (Procop. Soph., Ep. 123 χάριν ἔχειν εἰ=that) μαρτυρόμενος … εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός testifying … that the Christ was to suffer (s. πάσχω 3aα) Ac 26:23.—οὐ μέγα εἰ it is not surprising that 2 Cor 11:15 (cp. Aeschin., In Ctes. 94 ἐστὶ δεινὸν εἰ; Diod S 23, 15, 5, παράδοξον … εἰ=incredible … that; ibid. θαυμαστὸν εἰ; Gen 45:28 μέγα μοί ἐστιν εἰ).— That is also poss. after verbs of knowing or not knowing, e.g. J 9:25; Ac 19:2b; 1 Cor 1:16; 7:16; so CBurchard, ZNW 52, ’61, 73–82 but s. 5bα.
    ③ marker in causal clauses, when an actual case is taken as a supposition, where we also can use if instead of since: εἰ τὸν χόρτον … ὁ θεὸς οὕτως ἀμφιέννυσιν if God so clothes the grass Mt 6:30; Lk 12:28; cp. Mt 7:11; Lk 11:13; J 7:23; 10:35; 13:14, 17, 32; Ac 4:9; 11:17; Ro 6:8; 15:27; Col 2:20; Hb 7:15; 1 Pt 1:17; 1J 4:11.
    ④ marker of strong or solemn assertion, without apodosis (=in aposiopesis; B-D-F §482; Rob. 1203) εἰ ἔγνως if you only knew Lk 19:42. εἰ βούλει παρενέγκαι if you would only let (this) pass 22:42 v.l. (cp. the letter fr. IV B.C. in Dssm., LO 120, note 5 [LAE 149]).—Hebraistic in oaths, like אִם: may this or that happen to me, if … (cp. 2 Km 3:25; GBuchanan, HTR 58, ’65, 319–24); this amounts to a strong negation certainly not (cp. Ps 7:4f; Gen 14:23) ἀμὴν λέγω ὑμῖν εἰ δοθήσεται truly, I tell you, it will not be given Mk 8:12 (NColeman, JTS 28, 1927, 159–67 interprets this as strongly positive; against him FBurkitt, ibid. 274–76). εἰ εἰσελεύσονται they shall certainly not enter Hb 3:11; 4:3, 5 (all 3 Ps 94:11); B-D-F §372, 4; 454, 5; Mlt-H. 468f; Rob. 94; 1024.
    ⑤ marker of direct and indirect questions (without particle following)
    ⓐ (not in earlier Gk., B-D-F §440, 3; Rob. 916) w. direct questions (Gen 17:17; 44:19; Am 3:3–6; 6:12; TestAbr A 15 p.96, 8 [Stone p. 40]; 18 p. 100, 13 [St. p. 48]): εἰ ἔξεστιν; is it permitted, may one? Mt 12:10; 19:3 (cp. Mk 10:2); Lk 14:3 v.l.; Ac 21:37; 22:25. εἰ ὀλίγοι οἱ σωζόμενοι; are there only a few who will be saved? Lk 13:23; cp. Mk 8:23; Lk 22:49; Ac 1:6; 7:1; 19:2a. Cp. 6aβ.
    ⓑ freq. in indir. questions whether (Hom. et al.)
    α. w. pres. indic. (Gen 27:21; 42:16; TestJob 31:1; Jos., Ant. 10, 259; 16, 225; Ar 8, 1; Just., A I, 2, 2; A II, 2, 10) εἴπῃς εἰ σὺ εἶ ὁ Χριστός whether you are the Christ Mt 26:63. εἰ ἁμαρτωλός ἐστιν whether he is a sinner J 9:25; εἰ πνεῦμα ἅγιον ἔστιν whether there is a holy spirit Ac 19:2b (s. 2 above). ἴδωμεν εἰ ἔρχεται Mt 27:49; Mk 15:36 (Lucian, Dial. Mort. 20, 3 φέρʼ ἴδω εἰ=let me see whether, Merc. Cond. 6); cp. Mk 10:2; Lk 14:31; 1 Cor 3:12; 2 Cor 13:5; 1J 4:1.—W. the fut. indic. (4 Km 1:2; Job 5:1) εἰ θεραπεύσει αὐτόν whether he would heal him Mk 3:2 (v.l. θεραπεύει); Lk 6:7 v.l.; εἰ σώσεις whether you will save 1 Cor 7:16.—W. the aor. indic. (Esth 4:14; w. plpf. Just., D. 56, 2) εἰ πάλαι ἀπέθανεν whether he had already died Mk 15:44b; εἰ ἐβάπτισα 1 Cor 1:16.
    β. w. subj. διώκω εἰ καταλάβω I press on (to see) whether I can capture Phil 3:12 (B-D-F §368; 375; Rob. 1017).
    γ. w. opt. (X., An. 1, 8, 15; 2, 1, 15; 4 Macc 9:27; 11:13) ἀνακρίνοντες … εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα examining … to see whether this was really so Ac 17:11. εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι 25:20; cp. 17:27.
    ⑥ In combination w. other particles, w. the other particles foll.
    ⓐ εἰ ἄρα
    α. expressing possibility if, indeed; if, in fact; whether (perhaps) (X., An. 3, 2, 22; SIG 834, 12; Gen 18:3; s. B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 15:15 (εἴπερ ἄρα); Hv 3, 4, 3; 3, 7, 5; Hs 6, 4, 1; 8, 3, 3; 9, 5, 7; AcPt Ox 849, 6.
    β. introducing a direct question εἰ ἄρα ταῦτα οὕτως ἔχει; is it (really) so? Ac 7:1 v.l.; indirect qu. on the chance that (PPetr II, 13 [19] 9 ‘should you find it impossible’; Num 22:11) Mk 11:13; Ac 5:8 D; 8:22; in the hope that 17:27 (εἰ ἄρα γε); AcPt Ox 849, 2; 22. Cp. εἰ δέ … ; What if …? Ac 23:9.
    ⓑ εἴ γε if indeed, inasmuch as (Kühner-G. II 177c) Eph 3:2; 4:21; Col 1:23. τοσαῦτα ἐπάθετε εἰκῇ; εἴ γε καὶ εἰκῇ have you experienced so many things in vain? If it really was in vain Gal 3:4. εἴ γε καὶ ἐκδυσάμενοι οὐ γυμνοὶ εὑρεθησόμεθα assuming, of course, that having put it off we shall not be found naked 2 Cor 5:3. [εἴ γ]ε οὕτως ὡς [ἔστιν καὶ παρελάβετε τὸν λόγον] AcPl BMM recto, 31f (restoration based on duplicate Ox 1602 verso, 37f and AcPl Ha 8, 24f, which has a slightly difft. text after εἴ γε [s. also the text of Ghent 62, 17 in HSanders, HTR 31, ’38, 79, n. 2]). S. γέ bα.
    ⓒ εἰ δὲ καί (Just., D. 110, 1) but if, and if Lk 11:18; 1 Cor 4:7; and even if 2 Cor 4:3 (but s. Lietzmann, Hdb.); 11:6. If, on the other hand, … then AcPlCor 2:28 (εἰ … δέ … καί … μή).
    ⓓ εἰ δὲ μή (γε) if not, otherwise
    α. after affirmat. clauses, w. the aor. ind, and ἄν in the apodosis J 14:2; or pres. ind. (Demosth., Prooem. 29, 3) and fut. (Gen 30:1; Bel 29 Theod.; PLond 1912, 98) Rv 2:5, 16; or pres. impv. J 14:11.—εἰ δὲ μή γε (μήγε some edd.) otherwise (Pla. et al.; Epict. 3, 22, 27; Jos., Bell. 6, 120, Ant. 17, 113; Just., D. 105, 6; IGR IV, 833; POxy 1159, 6; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 167, 25; PGM 4, 2629; Da 3:15; Bel 8; TestSol 13:3 P): εἰ δὲ μή γε (sc. προσέχετε), μισθὸν οὐκ ἔχετε otherwise you have no reward Mt 6:1; cp. Lk 10:6. Elliptically: κἂν μὲν ποιήσῃ καρπὸν εἰς τὸ μέλλον• εἰ δὲ μή γε, ἐκκόψεις αὐτήν who knows, it may bear fruit next year; if not, fine, then cut it down (= have it cut down) 13:9.
    β. after negat. clauses, otherwise (X., An. 7, 1, 8; Diod S 3, 47, 4; Dio Chrys. 10 [11], 100; LBW 1651 μὴ ἀδικεῖν…, εἰ δὲ μή; UPZ 196 I, 33 [119 B.C.]; Job 32:22) Mk 2:21f.—After a negative statement: οὐδὲ βάλλουσιν οἶνον νέον εἰς ἀσκοὺς παλαιούς. εἰ δὲ μή γε, ῥήγνυνται people do not pour new wine into old skins; otherwise they burst Mt 9:17; cp. Lk 5:36. μή τίς με δόξῃ ἄφρονα εἶναι• εἰ δὲ μή γε, κἂν ὡς ἄφρονα δέχασθέ με no one is to consider me foolish; otherwise at least accept me as a fool 2 Cor 11:16.
    ⓔ εἰ καί even if, even though, although Lk 11:8; 18:4; 1 Cor 7:21; 2 Cor 4:16; 7:8; 12:11; Phil 2:17; Col 2:5; Hb 6:9; AcPlCor 2:32.
    ⓕ εἰ μὲν γάρ for if Ac 25:11 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν); 2 Cor 11:4; Hb 8:4 v.l. (for εἰ μὲν οὖν).
    ⓖ εἰ μὲν οὖν if, then Hb 7:11. W. εἰ δέ foll. (X., Cyr. 8, 7, 22; Ael. Aristid. 28, 156 K.=49 p. 542 D.) Ac 19:38.
    ⓗ εἰ μέντοι if, on the other hand Js 2:8.
    ⓘ εἰ μή (=πλήν) but 1 Cor 7:17 (= in general) (B-D-F §376).—After negatives
    α. except, if not, mostly without a verb depending on εἰ μή (X., An. 2, 1, 12; JosAs 12:11; Just., A I, 29, 1) Mt 11:27; 12:24; 16:4; J 3:13; Ro 7:7; Gal 1:19 (HKoch, Z. Jakobusfrage Gal 1:19: ZNW 33, ’34, 204–9); but also with a verb (Jos., Ant. 8, 316) Mt 5:13; Mk 6:5; Ac 21:25 v.l.
    β. but (OGI 201, 20f οὐκ ἀφῶ αὐτοὺς καθεσθῆναι εἰς τὴν σκιάν, εἰ μὴ ὑπὸ ἡλίου ἔξω; in note 33 the ed. gives exx. fr. Aristoph. for this use) without a verb Mt 12:4; w. a verb (Theod. Prodr. 7, 426 H.) Gal 1:7, s. ἄλλος 2b. For ἐκτὸς εἰ μή s. ἐκτός 3a.
    ⓙ εἰ μήτι unless indeed, unless perhaps (Ael. Aristid. 46 p. 198 D.; Jos., Ant. 4, 280; Tat. 10, 2) Lk 9:13; 2 Cor 13:5; w. ἄν (Ps.-Clem., Hom. 16, 4) 1 Cor 7:5 (s. Dssm., NB 32, 1 [BS 204 n.]; B-D-F §376; Mlt. 169; 239; Reinhold 35; JTrunk, De Basilio Magno sermonis Attic. imitatore 1911, 56; JWackernagel, Antike Anredeformen 1912, 27f).
    ⓚ εἰ οὖν if, therefore Mt 6:23; Lk 11:36; 12:26; J 13:14; 18:8; Col 3:1; Phlm 17.
    ⓛ εἴπερ if indeed, if after all, since (X., An. 1, 7, 9; Menand., Epitr. 907 S. [587 Kö.]; PHal 7, 6; UPZ 59, 29 [168 B.C.]; Jdth 6:9; TestJob 3:6; Just., Tat., Ath.) Ro 3:30 (ἐπείπερ v.l.); 8:9, 17; 2 Th 1:6.—if indeed, provided that εἴπερ ἄρα (ἄρα 1a) 1 Cor 15:15. καὶ γὰρ εἴπερ for even if (cp. Od. 1, 167; B-D-F §454, 2) 1 Cor 8:5; on 2 Cor 5:3 s. εἴ γε καί 6b above. Doubtful IEph 6:2; s. ἤ 2aβ.
    ⓜ if perchance, if haply εἰ δέ που … τις ἔλθοι if perchance … anyone came Papias (2:4).
    ⓝ εἴ πως (the spelling εἴπως is also correct; B-D-F §12) if perhaps, if somehow
    α. w. opt. (X., An. 2, 5, 2; 4, 1, 21; POxy 939, 15) εἴ πως δύναιντο παραχειμάσαι in the hope that they could spend the winter Ac 27:12.
    β. w. fut. indic. (3 Km 21:31; 4 Km 19:4; Jer 28:8; TestJos 6:6) εἴ πως εὐοδωθήσομαι whether, perhaps, I shall succeed Ro 1:10; cp. 11:14; Phil 3:11.
    ⓞ εἴτε … εἴτε (Soph. et al.; ins since 416 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw.]; pap [Mayser II/3, 159]; LXX; JosAs 5:9; ApcrEzk [Epiph 70, 11]; Jos., Ant. 16, 33 and 37; Just., Ath. B-D-F §446; 454, 3; Rob. ind.) if … (or) if, whether … or
    α. w. a verb in pres. indic. (Herm. Wr. 12, 22 thrice) 1 Cor 12:26; 2 Cor 1:6; or pres. subj. 1 Th 5:10.
    β. w. no verb (Just., D. 86, 3 al.) Ro 12:6–8; 1 Cor 3:22; 8:5; 2 Cor 5:10 al. εἴτε only once 1 Cor 14:27. εἴτε ἄρσενα εἴτε θήλειαν (ἤτε … ἤτε pap) GJs 4:1.
    ⑦ Used w. the indef. pron.: εἴ τις, εἴ τι everyone who or whoever; everything that or whatever Mt 16:24; 18:28; Mk 4:23; 9:35; Lk 9:23; 14:26; 1 Ti 3:1, 5; 5:4, 8, 16 al. Cp. 1 Cor 12:31 v.l. (ADebrunner, ConNeot XI, ’47, 37). W. subj. εἴ τις θελήσῃ Rv 11:5 s. 1b, above.—DELG. M-M.
    2
    εἰ μήν, more correctly εἶ μήν (B-D-F §24; Rob. 1150) for the older ἦ μήν (Hom. et al. [s. Denniston 350f], but found also Jos., Ant. 13, 76; 17, 42), in Hellenistic-Roman times (SIG 993, 20 [III B.C.]; 736, 27 [92 B.C.]; IG IV, 840, 15 [EHermann, Gr. Forschungen I 1912, 312]; pap since 112 B.C. [Mayser 78]; LXX e.g. Ezk 33:27; 34:8 al.; Num 14:28; Jdth 1:12; Bar 2:29 [Thackeray 83]) formula used in oaths surely, certainly Hb 6:14 (Gen 22:17).—Dssm., NB 33ff (BS 205ff).—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > εἰ

  • 32 κρίνω

    κρίνω (s. κρίμα; Hom.+) fut. κρινῶ; 1 aor. ἔκρινα; pf. κέκρικα; plpf. 3 sg. κεκρίκει (on the lack of augment s. B-D-F §66, 1; W-S. §12, 4; Mlt-H. 190; ἐκεκρίκει Just., D. 102, 2). Pass.: impf. ἐκρινόμην; 1 fut. κριθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἐκρίθην; pf. κέκριμαι. Primary mng.: ‘to set apart so as to distinguish, separate’, then by transference
    ① to make a selection, select, prefer (Aeschyl., Suppl. 39 τὶ; Pla., Rep. 3, 399e κρίνειν τινὰ πρό τινος ‘prefer someone to someone’, cp. Phlb. 57e; Himerius, Or. 40 [=Or. 6], 3 κ. τί τινι=select someth. because of someth. [a place because of its size]; κ. τὸ πρακτέον καὶ μὴ πρακτέον Did., Gen. 27, 3) ὸ̔ς μὲν γὰρ κρίνει ἡμέραν παρʼ ἡμέραν the one prefers one day to another Ro 14:5a. In the other half of the sentence ὸ̔ς δὲ κρίνει πᾶσαν ἡμέραν, κ. prob. has the sense recognize, approve (X., Hell. 1, 7, 34 ἔκριναν τὴν τῆς βουλῆς γνώμην) the other holds every day in esteem vs. 5b. Closely associated is mng.
    ② to pass judgment upon (and thereby seek to influence) the lives and actions of other people
    ⓐ judge, pass judgment upon, express an opinion about Mt 7:1a, 2a; Lk 6:37a; 1 Cl 13:2; Pol 2:3 (Sextus 183 ὁ κρίνων ἄνθρωπον κρίνεται ὑπὸ τ. θεοῦ). κ. δικαίως D 4:3; B 19:11. κ. κατʼ ὄψιν by the outward appearance J 7:24a. κατὰ τὴν σάρκα 8:15. τὴν δικαίαν κρίσιν κ. pass a right judgment 7:24b (on the expr. cp. Dt 16:18). This is perh. the place for 1 Pt 4:6 ἵνα κριθῶσιν κατὰ ἀνθρ. (s. ESelwyn, comm. ad loc. ref. to Lghtf.; cp. Wsd 3:4).
    ⓑ esp. pass an unfavorable judgment upon, criticize, find fault with, condemn (Epict. 2, 21, 11) Ro 2:1abc, 3; 14:3f, 10, 13a (a play on words, w. κρίνειν used in two different mngs. in the same vs.; s. 4 below on vs. 13b); Col 2:16; Js 4:11, 12; D 11:12. μή τι κρίνετε do not pronounce judgment on anything 1 Cor 4:5. ἱνατί γὰρ ἡ ἐλευθερία μου κρίνεται ὑπὸ ἄλλης συνειδήσεως; why is my freedom (of action) to be unfavorably judged by another person’s scruples? 1 Cor 10:29. μακάριος ὁ μὴ κρίνων ἑαυτόν happy is the one who finds no fault w. himself Ro 14:22.—Also of a human judgment directed against God ὅπως ἂν νικήσεις ἐν τῷ κρίνεσθαί σε that you may win when you are judged Ro 3:4 (OMichel in KEK prefers active sense); 1 Cl 18:4 (both Ps 50:6).
    ③ to make a judgment based on taking various factors into account, judge, think, consider, look upon w. double acc. of the obj. and the predicate (Soph., Oed. R. 34; Pla., Rep. 9, 578b and s. Cebes 39, 4; 3 Macc 2:33; Just., D. 112, 1) οὐκ ἀξίους κρίνετε ἑαυτούς you do not consider yourselves worthy Ac 13:46 (Jos., Ant. 6, 159 ὸ̔ν αὐτὸς τ. βασιλείας ἄξιον ἔκρινεν; EpArist 98); cp. PtK 3 p. 15, 17. τὰ ὑστερήματα αὐτῶν ἴδια ἐκρίνετε you considered their shortcomings as your own 1 Cl 2:6. Pass. (Thu. 2, 40, 3; Jos., Ant. 4, 193) τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρʼ ὑμῖν; why do you think it is incredible? Ac 26:8 (Jos., Ant. 18, 76 ἄπιστα αὐτὰ κρίνειν).—Foll. by acc. w. inf. (Pla., Gorg., 452c, Rep. 9, 578b; X., An. 1, 9, 5; 28) κεκρίκατέ με πιστὴν … εἶναι Ac 16:15.—W. inf. foll. κρίνω μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς κτλ. 15:19.—Foll. by τοῦτο ὅτι 2 Cor 5:14.—W. direct quest. foll. ἐν ὑμῖν αὐτοῖς κρίνατε judge, decide for yourselves 1 Cor 11:13.—W. indirect quest. foll. (Thu. 4, 130, 7 κρίναντες ἐν σφίσιν αὐτοῖς, εἰ … ; X., Cyr. 4, 1, 5) εἰ δίκαιόν ἐστιν, ὑμῶν ἀκούειν μᾶλλον ἢ τοῦ θεοῦ, κρίνατε decide whether it is right to obey you rather than God Ac 4:19.—κρίνατε ὑμεῖς ὅ φημι pass your own judgment on what I say 1 Cor 10:15.—ὀρθῶς ἔκρινας you have judged rightly Lk 7:43.
    ④ to come to a conclusion after a cognitive process, reach a decision, decide, propose, intend (Isocr. 4, 46; Polyb. 3, 6, 7; 5, 52, 6; 9, 13, 7; Epict. 2, 15, 7; Appian, Bell. Civ. 14, 118 §497 ὅταν οἱ θεοὶ κρίνωσιν; LXX) τί οὖν θέλετε, κρίνατε (restored) so decide now what you wish (to be done); w. inf. (Diod S 4, 33, 10; 17, 95, 1; UPZ 42, 37 [162 B.C.]; PTebt 55, 4 [II B.C.] ἔκρινα γράψαι; PLond III, 897, 11 p. 207 [84 A.D.]; 1 Macc 11:33; 3 Macc 1:6; Jdth 11:13; Wsd 8:9; Jos., Ant.7, 33; 12, 403; 13, 188; Did., Gen. 179, 7) Ac 3:13; 20:16; 25:25; 1 Cor 2:2; 5:3; Tit 3:12. W. τοῦ and inf. (B-D-F §397, 2) ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς Ac 27:1. ἐπεὶ ἤδη σεαυτῷ κέκρικας τοῦ μὴ δύνασθαι τὰς ἐντολὰς ταύτας ὑπὸ ἀνθρώπου φυλαχθῆναι since you have already decided in your own mind that these commandments cannot be kept by anyone Hm 12, 3, 6.—W. acc. and inf. (2 Macc 11:25, 36; 3 Macc 6:30; TestSol 10:8; SibOr 3, 127; Just., D. 102, 2) Ac 21:25 (even in the substantially different rdgs.). τοῦτο κέκρικεν …, τηρεῖν τὴν ἑαυτοῦ παρθένον he has determined this, namely to keep his fiancée (pure and undefiled) 1 Cor 7:37 (s. s.v. γαμίζω 2; Diod S 4, 73, 2 of a father: κρίναι ταύτην [i.e. his daughter] παρθένον διαφυλάττειν). τοῦτο κρίνατε μᾶλλον, τὸ μὴ τιθέναι πρόσκομμα but rather decide this, (namely) to give no offense Ro 14:13b. ἔκρινα ἐμαυτῷ τοῦτο, τὸ … ἐλθεῖν 2 Cor 2:1. τὰ δόγματα τὰ κεκριμένα ὑπὸ τ. ἀποστόλων Ac 16:4 (cp. Polyb. 5, 52, 6 πράξας τὸ κριθέν; Epict. 2, 15, 7 τοῖς κριθεῖσιν ἐμμένειν δεῖ).
    ⑤ to engage in a judicial process, judge, decide, hale before a court, condemn, also hand over for judicial punishment, freq. as a legal t.t. (in a forensic sense Hom. et al.; ins, pap, LXX).
    ⓐ of a human court
    α. act. and pass. abs. Ac 13:27. W. adv. GPt 3:7. κ. τινά: κατὰ τὸν νόμον J 18:31; Ac 23:3; 24:6 v.l. οὐδὲ ἐγὼ κρίνω ὑμᾶς GJs 16:3. Of the right of the apostle and the church to judge believers 1 Cor 5:12ab. μὴ ὁ νόμος ἡμῶν κρίνει τὸν ἄνθρωπον; does our law (personified) judge a person? J 7:51 (Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 50 §205 certain senators desire that before Mark Antony is declared a public enemy he should be brought to trial, ὡς οὐ πάτριον σφίσιν ἀκρίτου καταδικάζειν ‘on the ground that it was not their ancestral custom to condemn someone without a hearing’). ἐκ τ. στόματός σου κρινῶ σε I will punish you on the basis of your own statement Lk 19:22. Pass. Ac 25:10. κρίνεσθαι ἐπί τινι be on trial because of a thing 26:6 (Appian, Basil. 12 κρινόμενος ἐπὶ τῷδε=be brought to trial because of this thing; likew. Iber. 55 §233; Ath. 2, 3; of God ApcrEzk Fgm. d). Also περί τινος (Diod S 12, 30, 5) 23:6; 25:20; w. addition of ἐπί w. gen. of the court of judicature before someone (schol. on Hes., Op. 9) 24:21; 25:9; D 11:11.—τί δὲ καὶ ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν οὐ κρίνετε τὸ δίκαιον; Lk 12:57, which leads over into the sphere of jurisprudence (vs. 58), means: why cannot you yourselves decide what is right? (cp. the prayer for vengeance fr. Amorgos [BCH 25, 1901 p. 416; Dssm., LO 94=LAE 118] ἐπάκουσον, θεά, καὶ κρῖναι τὸ δίκαιον; cp. Appian, Mithrid. 89 §403 κρίνειν τὴν μάχην=decide the battle; Just., A II, 15, 5).
    β. mid. and pass.: ‘dispute, quarrel, debate’, also go to law (so Thu. 4, 122, 4 δίκῃ κρίνεσθαι; Hos 2:4 al. in LXX; TestSol 4:4ff D; Mel., P. 101, 773) τινί with someone (Job 9:3; 13:19) Mt 5:40; B 6:1 (Is 50:8); μετά τινος (Vi. Aesopi W 76 κριθῆναί με μετὰ τῆς κυρίας μου ἐπὶ σοί=I am pleading my case with my mistress before you; Eccl 6:10) 1 Cor 6:6. ἐπί τινος before someone (as judge) vs. 1 (on the beginning of 1 Cor 6 cp. the decree of Alexander to the Greeks in Ps.-Callisth. 2, 21, 21: βούλομαι δὲ μὴ ἐν ἑαυτοῖς κρίνειν ὅσον τις ὑμῶν ἔχει πρὸς ἕτερον, οὐδὲ ἐφʼ οὗ βούλεσθε=it is my wish [will] that you are not to go to law among yourselves, no matter what any of you may have against another, nor before anyone you wish).
    ⓑ of the divine tribunal
    α. occupied by God or Christ: abs. administer justice, judge J 5:30; 8:16, 50; cp. vs. 26; Rv 6:10; B 5:7. Pass. be judged Mt 7:1b, 2b; Lk 6:37b; Rv 11:18.—W. acc. foll. (PGM 4, 1013 of Horus ὁ κρίνων τὰ πάντα) J 5:22; 8:15b. τοὺς ἔξω 1 Cor 5:13. ζῶντας καὶ νεκρούς judge the living and the dead 2 Ti 4:1; 1 Pt 4:5; B 7:2. τὰ κρυπτὰ τῶν ἀνθρώπων Ro 2:16. τὸν κόσμον B 4:12 (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 10 [Stone p. 32]; ApcEsdr 3:3 p. 27, 8 Tdf.). τὴν οἰκουμένην Ac 17:31; AcPl Ha 9, 29. κ. κατὰ τὸ ἑκάστου ἔργον judge each one by what that person does 1 Pt 1:17; cp. Rv 20:13. ἐκρίθησαν οἱ νεκροὶ ἐκ τῶν γεγραμμένων ἐν τοῖς βιβλίοις κατὰ τὰ ἔργα αὐτῶν the dead were judged by what was written in the books (of life and of death), in accordance w. their deeds vs. 12; δικαίως κ. judge uprightly (Sotades [280 B.C.] Fgm. 11, 2 Diehl2 II 6 p. 191 [in Stob. 4, 34, 8 vol. V p. 826, 5=Coll. Alex. p. 243] ὁ παντογενὴς … οὐ κρίνει δικαίως) 1 Pt 2:23; B 19:11. Also ἐν δικαιοσύνῃ Rv 19:11. διὰ νόμου κρίνεσθαι be judged on the basis of the law Js 2:12.—Oft. the emphasis is unmistakably laid upon that which follows the Divine Judge’s verdict, upon the condemnation or punishment: condemn, punish (opp. σῴζειν as TestJud 24:6; Mel., P. 104, 810; cp. ApcEsdr 1, 11 p. 25, 3 Tdf. ἐμὲ κρῖνον ὑπὲρ τῶν ψυχῶν τῶν ἁμαρτωλῶν) J 3:17; cp. 18ab; 12:47ab, 48a; cp. 48b; Ac 7:7 (Gen 15:14); Dg 7:5f (opp. ἀγαπᾶν). διὰ νόμου κ. punish on the basis of the law Ro 2:12.—3:6f; 1 Cor 11:31f (here of the temporal punishment which God brings upon sinners); 2 Th 2:12; Hb 10:30 (κρινεῖ κύριος τὸν λαὸν αὐτοῦ the Lord will judge = punish his people is derived fr. Dt 32:36=Ps 134:14, where the judgment of God is spoken of, resulting in the vindication of the innocent [the thought prominent in the two OT pass.] and the punishment of the guilty [the thought prominent in the Hb pass.]); 13:4; Js 5:9; for 1 Pt 4:6 s. 2a above; Rv 18:8; 19:2; B 15:5.—W. the punishment given κ. διὰ πυρός 1 Cl 11:1; διὰ τῶν μαστίγων 17:5. κεκριμένοι ἤδη τῷ θανάτῳ already condemned to death B 10:5. Also εἰς θάνατον condemned to death Hs 9, 18, 2. οἱ κρινόμενοι ἀσεβεῖς the godless, who are condemned 2 Cl 18:1. Of the devil ὁ ἄρχων τοῦ κόσμου τούτου κέκριται J 16:11.—ταῦτα ἔκρινας you have imposed these punishments Rv 16:5.—On κρίνειν τὸ κρίμα 18:20 s. κρίμα 4.
    β. occupied by those who have been divinely commissioned to judge: the 12 apostles judge the 12 tribes Mt 19:28; Lk 22:30 (PBatiffol, RB n.s. 9, 1912, 541–43. But here κ. could have the broader sense rule; cp. 4 Km 15:5; Ps 2:10; 1 Macc 9:73; PsSol 17:29). κρινεῖ ἡ ἐκ φύσεως ἀκροβυστία … σέ the one who is physically uncircumcised will sit in judgment upon you Ro 2:27. οἱ ἅγιοι as judges of the cosmos 1 Cor 6:2ab (κρίνεσθαι ἐν: Diod S 19, 51, 4.—On the saints as co-rulers with God cp. Epict., Ench. 15; Sallust. 21 p. 36, 14) as well as of the angels vs. 3 (cp. Da 7:22).
    ⑥ to ensure justice for someone, see to it that justice is done (LXX) τινί to someone 1 Cl 8:4 (Is 1:17).—B. 1428. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > κρίνω

  • 33 μέλλω

    μέλλω (Hom.+) fut. μελλήσω; impf. ἔμελλον (all edd. J 6:6; Ac 21:27) and ἤμελλον (all edd. Lk 7:2; 19:4; J 4:47; 12:33; 18:32; Hb 11:8; s. B-D-F §66, 3; W.-S. §12, 3; Mlt-H. 188. In Att. ins the ἠ-appears after 300 B.C. [Meisterhans3-Schw. 169]. In IPriene ἐ-occurs only once: 11, 5 [c. 297 B.C.]).
    ① to take place at a future point of time and so to be subsequent to another event, be about to, used w. an inf. foll.
    ⓐ only rarely w. the fut. inf., w. which it is regularly used in ancient Gk. (Hom. et al.), since in colloquial usage the fut. inf. and ptc. were gradually disappearing and being replaced by combinations with μέλλω (B-D-F §338, 3; 350; s. Rob. 882; 889). W. the fut. inf. μ. denotes certainty that an event will occur in the future μ. ἔσεσθαι (SIG 914, 10 μέλλει ἔσεσθαι; 247 I, 74 ἔμελλε … [δώσε]ιν; Jos., Ant. 13, 322; Mel., P. 57, 415) will certainly take place or be Ac 11:28; 24:15; 27:10; 1 Cl 43:6; cp. Dg 8:2.
    ⓑ w. the aor. inf. (rarely in ancient Gk. [but as early as Hom., and e.g. X., Cyr. 1, 4, 16]; Herodas 3, 78 and 91; UPZ 70, 12 [152/1 B.C.]; PGiss 12, 5; POxy 1067, 17; 1488, 20; Ex 4:12; Job 3:8; 2 Macc 14:41; JosAs 29:3; ParJer 9:13; GrBar 4:15 [Christ.]; ApcMos13; s. Phryn. p. 336; 745ff Lob.; WRutherford, New Phryn. 1881, 420ff) be on the point of, be about to, μ. ἀποκαλυφθῆναι be about to be revealed Ro 8:18. τὸ δωδεκάφυλον τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ μέλλον ἀπολέσθαι the twelve tribes of Israel that were about to be destroyed 1 Cl 55:6. ἤμελλεν προαγαγεῖν Ac 12:6. ἀποθανεῖν Rv 3:2. ἐμέσαι vs. 16. τεκεῖν 12:4.
    ⓒ w. the pres. inf. So mostly (ca. 80 times in the NT.; oft. in lit., ins, pap, LXX; TestAbr B 4 p. 108, 14 [Stone p. 64]; ApcEsdr 6:23f p. 32, 2f Tdf.; EpArist; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 7 Jac.; Just., A I, 51, 8; D. 32, 4 al.; Tat. 14, 1; Mel., P. 38, 263; Ath. 32, 1).
    α. be about to, be on the point of ἤμελλεν τελευτᾶν he was at the point of death (Aristot. Fgm. 277 [in Apollon. Paradox. 27] and Diod S 6, 4, 3 μέλλων τελευτᾶν; cp. Jos., Ant. 4, 83; 12, 357) Lk 7:2. Also ἤμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν (Artem. 4, 24 p. 217, 5 γραῦς μέλλουσα ἀποθνῄσκειν; Aesop, Fab. 131 P.=202 H.; 233 P.=216 H.; 2 Macc 7:18; 4 Macc 10:9) J 4:47. ἤμελλεν ἑαυτὸν ἀναιρεῖν he was about to kill himself Ac 16:27. Of God’s eschat. reign μέλλειν ἔρχεσθαι 1 Cl 42:3. Of heavenly glory ἡ μέλλουσα ἀποκαλύπτεσθαι 1 Pt 5:1. Cp. Lk 19:4; J 6:6; Ac 3:3; 5:35; 18:14; 21:27; 22:26; 23:27.—Occasionally almost = begin ἤμελλον γράφειν Rv 10:4. ὅταν μέλλῃ ταῦτα συντελεῖσθαι πάντα when all these things are (or begin) to be accomplished Mk 13:4; cp. Lk 21:7; Rv 10:7.
    β. in a weakened sense it serves simply as a periphrasis for the fut. (PMich III, 202, 8ff; 13ff [105 A.D.].—Mayser II/1, 226) ὅσα λαλῶ ἢ καὶ μ. λαλεῖν (=ἢ καὶ λαλήσω) what I tell or shall tell Hm 4, 4, 3. So esp. oft. in Hermas: μ. λέγειν v 1, 1, 6; 3, 8, 11; m 11:7, 17; Hs 5, 2, 1. μ. ἐντέλλεσθαι v 5:5; m 5, 2, 8. μ. κατοικεῖν Hs 1:1; 4:2. μ. χωρεῖν (=χωρήσω) IMg 5:1. μ. βασιλεύειν GJs 23:2.—Substitute for the disappearing fut. forms (inf. and ptc. B-D-F §356); for the fut. inf.: προσεδόκων αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι Ac 28:6; for the fut. ptc.: ὁ μέλλων ἔρχεσθαι Mt 11:14. ὁ τοῦτο μέλλων πράσσειν the one who was going to do this Lk 22:23; cp. 24:21; Ac 13:34. οἱ μέλλοντες πιστεύειν those who were to believe (in him) in the future 1 Ti 1:16; 1 Cl 42:4; Hm 4, 3, 3. μέλλοντες ἀσεβεῖν those who were to be ungodly in the future 2 Pt 2:6 v.l. (s. 3, end). Of Christ ὁ μέλλων κρίνειν 2 Ti 4:1; 7:2. οἱ μέλλοντες ἀρνεῖσθαι = οἱ ἀρνησόμενοι Hv 2, 2, 8. πυρὸς ζῆλος ἐσθίειν μέλλοντος τοὺς ὑπεναντίους raging fire that will devour the opponents Hb 10:27.
    γ. denoting an intended action: intend, propose, have in mind μέλλει Ἡρῴδης ζητεῖν τὸ παιδίον Herod intends to search for the child Mt 2:13. οὗ ἤμελλεν αὐτὸς ἔρχεσθαι where he himself intended to come Lk 10:1. μέλλουσιν ἔρχεσθαι they intended to come J 6:15. Cp. vs. 71; 7:35; 12:4; 14:22; Ac 17:31; 20:3, 7, 13ab; 23:15; 26:2; 27:30; Hb 8:5; 2 Pt 1:12. τί μέλλεις ποιεῖν; what do you intend to do? Hs 1:5. οὐ μ. ποιεῖν I have no intention of doing MPol 8:2. μ. προσηλοῦν they wanted to nail him fast 13:3. μ. λαμβάνειν we wanted to take him out 17:2.
    ② to be inevitable, be destined, inevitable
    ⓐ w. pres. inf. to denote an action that necessarily follows a divine decree is destined, must, will certainly … μ. πάσχειν he is destined to suffer Mt 17:12; B 7:10; 12:2; cp. 6:7. μ. σταυροῦσθαι must be crucified 12:1. μ. παραδίδοσθαι Mt 17:22; Lk 9:44; 16:5. ἔμελλεν ἀποθνῄσκειν J 11:51; 12:33; 18:32. ἐν σαρκὶ μ. φανεροῦσθαι B 6:7, 9, 14. Cp. Mt 16:27; 20:22; Ro 4:24; 8:13; Rv 12:5. οὐκέτι μέλλουσιν … θεωρεῖν they should no more see … Ac 20:38. τὰ μ. γίνεσθαι what must come to pass 26:22; cp. Rv 1:19. διὰ τοὺς μέλλοντας κληρονομεῖν σωτηρίαν those who are to inherit salvation Hb 1:14. μέλλομεν θλίβεσθαι that we were to be afflicted 1 Th 3:4.—Mk 10:32; Lk 9:31; J 7:39; Hb 11:8. ἐν ἡμέρᾳ ᾗ ἔμελλε θηριομαχεῖν on the day on which Paul was to fight the wild animals AcPl Ha 3, 9. ὡς μελλούσης τῆς πόλεως αἴρεσθαι in expectation of the city’s destruction 5, 16. ἄνωθεν μέλλω σταυροῦσθαι I (Jesus) am about to be crucified once more 7, 39.
    ⓑ w. aor. inf. ἀποκαλυφθῆναι that is destined (acc. to God’s will) to be revealed Gal 3:23.
    ③ The ptc. is used abs. in the mng. (in the) future, to come (Pind., O. 10, 7 ὁ μέλλων χρόνος ‘the due date’) ὁ αἰὼν μέλλων the age to come (s. αἰών 2b), which brings the reign of God (opp. ὁ αἰὼν οὗτος or ὁ νῦν αἰών) Mt 12:32; Eph 1:21; 2 Cl 6:3; Pol 5:2; cp. Hb 6:5. Also ὁ μ. καιρός (opp. ὁ νῦν κ.) 4:1. ἡ μ. ζωή (opp. ἡ νῦν ζ.) 1 Ti 4:8. ὁ μ. βίος (opp. ὁ νῦν β.) 2 Cl 20:2. ἡ μ. βασιλεία 5:5; ἡ οἰκουμένη ἡ μ. the world to come Hb 2:5. ἡ μέλλουσα πόλις (as wordplay, opp. [οὐ … ] μένουσα π.) 13:14. ἡ μ. ἐπαγγελία the promise for the future 2 Cl 10:3f. τὰ μ. ἀγαθά Hb 9:11 v.l.; Hv 1, 1, 8. ἡ μ. ἀνάστασις 1 Cl 24:1; τὸ κρίμα τὸ μ. the judgment to come Ac 24:25; cp. 1 Cl 28:1; 2 Cl 18:2; MPol 11:2. ἡ μ. ὀργή Mt 3:7; IEph 11:1. ἡ μ. θλῖψις Hv 4, 2, 5. τὰ μ. σκάνδαλα 4:9.—ἡ μέλλουσά σου ἀδελφή your future sister=the one who in the future will be your sister, no longer your wife Hv 2, 2, 3. Several times the noun can be supplied fr. the context: τύπος τοῦ μέλλοντος, i.e. Ἀδάμ Ro 5:14.—Subst. τὸ μέλλον the future (Aeneas Tact. 422; 431 al.; Antiphanes Com. [IV B.C.] 227 K.; Menand., Monostich. 412 [608 Jaekel] Mei.; Anacreont. 36; Plut., Caes. 14, 4; Herodian 1, 14, 2; SIG 609, 5; ViEzk 13 [p. 75, 12 Sch.]; Philo, Mel.) 1 Cl 31:3. εἰς τὸ μ. for the future (Jos., Ant. 9, 162) 1 Ti 6:19; specif. (in the) next year (PLond III, 1231, 4 p. 108 [144 A.D.] τὴν εἰς τὸ μέλλον γεωργείαν; s. Field, Notes 65) Lk 13:9. τὰ μ. the things to come (X., Symp. 4, 47; Aeneas Tact. 1050; Artem. 1, 36; Wsd 19:1; TestJob 47:9; JosAs 23:8; Philo; Just., D. 7, 1; Ath. 27, 2) Col 2:17; PtK 3 p. 15, 21. (Opp. τὰ ἐνεστῶτα the present as PGM 5, 295) Ro 8:38; 1 Cor 3:22; B 1:7; 5:3; 17:2. Ox 1081 39f (SJCh 91, 2) (s. ἀρχή 2). Uncertain 2 Pt 2:6 (if ἀσεβέσιν is to be retained, the ref. is to impending judgment for the impious).
    ④ delay τί μέλλεις why are you delaying? (cp. Aeschyl., Prom. 36; Eur., Hec. 1094; Thu. 8, 78; Lucian, Dial. Mort. 10, 13; Jos., Bell. 3, 494 τί μέλλομεν; 4 Macc 6:23; 9:1) Ac 22:16. οὐ μελλήσας without delay AcPl Ha 8, 4. The connection in AcPt Ox 849, 1 is uncertain.—B. 974. DELG. M-M. TW.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > μέλλω

  • 34 οὐ

    1
    οὐ (Hom.+; s. Schwyzer II 591–94) objective (as opp. to subjective μή) negative adv., denying the reality of an alleged fact; in the NT used w. the ind. (μή serves as the neg. for the other moods, including inf. and ptc.—w. certain exceptions, which will be discussed below. S. B-D-F §426; Rob. 1168f; Mlt-Turner 281f). Before vowels w. the smooth breathing it takes the form οὐκ; before those w. the rough breathing it is οὐχ; in the mss. this rule is freq. disregarded (W-S. §5, 10bc; B-D-F §14; Rob. 224). On its use s. B-D-F §426–33; Rdm.2 p. 210ff; Rob. 1155–66.
    ① a negative response to a question or statement, as accented form, οὔ: no Mt 13:29 (Schwyzer II 596f); J 1:21; 7:12; 21:5. ἤτω ὑμῶν τὸ οὒ οὔ let your ‘no’ be ‘no’ Js 5:12. Doubled for emphasis (s. ναί e.—οὒ οὔ Nicetas Eugen. 5, 76 H. Likew. μὴ μή=no, no! [Herodas 3, 71; Meleager, I B.C., in Anth. Pal. 12, 80, 3; Psellus p. 268, 15 μὴ μὴ μάγιστρε]) Mt 5:37; 2 Cor 1:17ff. On οὐ μὲν οὖν s. οὐμενοῦν.
    ② marker of negative propositions, not
    ⓐ used to negative single words or clauses (Ar. 13, 7 μῦθοί εἰσι καὶ οὐκ ἄλλο τι; Just., A II, 2, 2 οὐ σωφρόνως; Tat. 5, 1 οὐ κατὰ ἀποκοπήν;—as earlier Gk.: Hom. et al.; s. Kühner-G. II, 182; Schwyzer II 593f)
    α. οὐ πᾶς not every one Mt 7:21. οὐ πάντες 19:11; Ro 9:6; 10:16. πάντες οὐ κοιμηθησόμεθα we shall not all fall asleep 1 Cor 15:51 (s. JBurn, ET, 1926, 236f; POppenheim, TQ 112, ’31, 92–135; AVaccari, Biblica 13, ’32, 73–76; B-D-F §433, 2; Rob. 753). Likew. transposed διατί πάντες οὐ μετενόησαν; why have not all repented? Hs 8, 6, 2. οὐ πᾶσα σάρξ 1 Cor 15:39. οὐ πάντως Ro 3:9; 1 Cor 5:10.—καλέσω τὸν οὐ λαόν μου λαόν μου those who were not my people I will call my people Ro 9:25a (Hos 2:25b); cp. 1 Pt 2:10. οὐκ ἔθνος no nation at all Ro 10:19 (Dt 32:21).
    β. freq. in litotes (cp. Lysias 13, 62 εἰ μὲν οὐ πολλοὶ ἦσαν Tat. 3, 2) οὐ πολλοί, πολλαί J 2:12; Ac 1:5 (οὐ μετὰ πολλὰς ἡμέρας = μετʼ οὐ πολλ. ἡμ.; cp. οὐκ ἐξ ὄντων = ἐξ οὐκ ὄντων 2 Macc 7:28). οὐκ ὀλίγος, ὀλίγη, ὀλίγοι, ὀλίγαι Ac 17:4, 12; 19:23f; 27:20. οὐκ ἄσημος 21:39. οὐχ ἁγνῶς Phil 1:17. οὐ μετρίως Ac 20:12. οὐκ ἐκ μέτρου J 3:34. μετʼ οὐ πολύ soon (afterward) Ac 27:14 S. also δ below.
    γ. not in a contrast τῷ κυρίῳ καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώποις Col 3:23. τρέχω ὡς οὐκ ἀδήλως 1 Cor 9:26.
    δ. as a periphrasis for some concepts expressed by verbs: οὐκ ἀγνοεῖν know quite well 2 Cor 2:11. οὐκ ἐᾶν prevent Ac 16:7 (cp. Il. 2, 132); 19:30. οὐκ ἔχειν be in need Mt 13:12; Mk 4:25 (on these two pass. s. Schwyzer II 593, w. ref. to Kühner-G. II 189–92; contrast the use of μή in Lk 8:18). οὐ θέλειν refuse 2 Th 3:10. οὐ πταίειν Js 3:2. οὐχ ὑπακούειν be disobedient 2 Th 3:14. οὐ φιλεῖν be unfriendly to, disesteem 1 Cor 16:22.
    ⓑ used sometimes w. the ptc. From a above are derived the points under which this is done, contrary to the rule given at beg. of entry. In addition, it is prob. that in individual cases earlier literary influence is still at work (for earlier Gk. s. Kühner-G. II 198–203. μή suggests contingency).—B-D-F §430; Mlt. 231f (w. pap exx.; cp. Just., A I, 33, 4 οὐ συνουσιασθεῖσαν τὴν παρθένον; 67, 5 τοῖς οὐ παροῦσι al.); Rdm.2 212; Mlt-Turner 284f.
    α. to negative a single concept: πράγματα οὐ βλεπόμενα things not seen Hb 11:1. οὐχ ὁ τυχών extraordinary Ac 19:11; 28:2 (cp. Com. Att. Fgm. III 442 no. 178 οὐδὲ τοῖς τυχοῦσι). θλιβόμενοι ἀλλʼ, οὐ στενοχωρούμενοι 2 Cor 4:8; cp. vs. 9.
    β. in strong emphasis or contrast: ἄνθρωπον οὐκ ἐνδεδυμένον ἔνδυμα γάμου (emphasizing the fact that his dress was improper) Mt 22:11. οὐ προσδεξάμενοι τὴν ἀπολύτρωσιν (emphasizing the great heroism of their act) Hb 11:35. οὐ βλέπων Lk 6:42. οὐκ ἰδόντες 1 Pt 1:8. οὐκ ὄντος αὐτῷ τέκνου Ac 7:5.—Contrast: Ac 28:19. τότε μὲν οὐκ εἰδότες θεὸν … νῦν δέ Gal 4:8. καὶ οὐ introducing a contrast is also used w. the ptc. καὶ οὐκ ἐν σαρκὶ πεποιθότες Phil 3:3. καὶ οὐ κρατῶν Col 2:19. ὁ μισθωτὸς καὶ οὐκ ὢν ποιμήν J 10:12.
    γ. In quotations fr. the LXX in the NT we notice the tendency of the OT translators regularly to render לֹא w. the ptc. by οὐ: ἡ οὐ τίκτουσα, ἡ οὐκ ὠδίνουσα Gal 4:27 (Is 54:1). τὴν οὐκ ἠγαπημένην Ro 9:25b (Hos 2:25a). οἱ οὐκ ἠλεημένοι 1 Pt 2:10 (Hos 1:6).
    δ. τὰ οὐκ ἀνήκοντα Eph 5:4 v.l. is presumably a mingling of τὰ μὴ ἀνήκοντα and (the rdg. in the text itself) ἃ οὐκ ἀνῆκεν (as early as P46).
    ⓒ in main clauses
    α. in simple statements w. the indic. οὐκ ἐγίνωσκεν αὐτήν Mt 1:25. οὐ δύνασθε θεῷ δουλεύειν καὶ μαμωνᾷ 6:24. οὐκ ἤφιεν λαλεῖν τὰ δαιμόνια Mk 1:34. οὐκ ἦν αὐτοῖς τέκνον Lk 1:7. οὐχ ὑμῶν ἐστιν Ac 1:7. οὐ γάρ ἐπαισχύνομαι τὸ εὐαγγέλιον Ro 1:16 and very oft. οὐ γάρ σου ἠκούσαμέν ποτε AcPlCor 1:14.
    β. used to negative the prohibitive future (Hebr. לֹא w. the impf.—Synes., Ep. 67 p. 211b οὐκ ἀγνοήσεις) οὐ φονεύσεις Mt 5:21; cp. vs. 27; Mt 19:18; Ro 7:7; 13:9 (all commandments fr. the Decalogue: Ex 20:13–17; Dt 5:17–21). Also οὐκ ἐπιορκήσεις Mt 5:33. οὐκ ἐκπειράσεις κύριον Lk 4:12 (Dt 6:16); Ac 23:5 (Ex 22:27); 1 Cor 9:9 (Dt 25:4).—Mt 6:5.
    ⓓ in subordinate clauses
    α. in relative clauses w. indic. (in the NT, μή is found in such clauses only Tit 1:11; 2 Pt 1:9; 1J 4:3 [but s. B-D-F §428, 4 and Rob. 1158]; Ac 15:29 D; Col 2:18 v.l.): Mt 10:38; 12:2; Mk 4:25 (s. 2aδ above) Lk 6:2; J 6:64; Ro 15:21 (Is 52:15); Gal 3:10 (Dt 27:26) al.
    β. in declarative clauses w. ὅτι, likew. in temporal and causal clauses w. ind.: ὅτι οὐ J 5:42; 1 Th 2:1. ὁ ἀρνούμενος ὅτι Ἰησοῦς οὐκ ἔστιν ὁ Χριοτός 1J 2:22 (on the negative here s. ἀρνέομαι 2).—ἐπει οὐ Lk 1:34. ὅτε οὐ 2 Ti 4:3.—εἰ οὐ w. indic.: εἰ οὐ δώσει αὐτῷ Lk 11:8; cp. ὅστις (ὸ̔ς) οὐκ ἔχει Mt 13:12 and Mk 4:25=ὸ̔ς ἂν μὴ ἔχει Lk 8:18 (Schwyzer II 593). εἰ ἐν τῷ ἀλλοτρίῳ πιστοὶ οὐκ ἐγένεσθε 16:12; Mk 11:26; Lk 18:4; J 1:25; 10:37; Ro 8:9b; 11:21; Hb 12:25.—Once actually in a contrary-to-fact condition: καλὸν ἦν αὐτῷ εἰ οὐκ ἐγεννήθη Mt 26:24=Mk 14:21=1 Cl 46:8 (B-D-F §428, 2; Rob. 1160; Mlt-Turner 284).
    ⓔ in combination w. other negatives, strengthening the negation (Mel. Chor. Adesp., Fgm. no. 11 Diehl2 [’42] οὐ μήποτε τὰν ἀρετὰν ἀλλάξομαι ἀντʼ ἀδίκου κέρδεος ‘I shall never exchange virtue for unjust gain’; GrBar 13:3 οὐκ … οὐδέν; Just., D. 26, 1) Mt 22:16; Mk 5:37; Lk 4:2; 23:53 (οὐκ ἦν οὐδεὶς οὔπω); J 6:63; 11:49; 12:19; 15:5; Ac 8:39; 2 Cor 11:9. οὐ μηκέτι (s. μηκέτι fα) Mt 21:19 v.l. For use in questions s. 3 below.
    α. On the combination of οὐ and μή s. μή 4.
    β. The combining of οὐδέ and οὐ μή to form οὐδʼ οὐ μή instead of οὐδὲ μή is a late development (a barbarism?; B-D-F §431, 3; Rob. 1175; Mlt-Turner 286.—Prayer to the god Socnopaeus: Mitt-Wilck I/2, 122, 2ff εἰ οὐ δίδοταί μοι συμβιῶσαι Ταπεθεῦτι Μαρρείους οὐδʼ οὐ μὴ γένηται ἄλλου γυνή [Rdm.2 211f]; LXX) Mt 24:21. οὐ μή σε ἀνῶ οὐδʼ οὐ μή σε ἐγκαταλίπω Hb 13:5 (Dt 31:6 A, 8 A οὐδ οὐ μή; 1 Ch 28:20 A).—οὐδὲν … οὐ μὴ ἀδικήσει instead of οὐδὲν … μὴ … Lk 10:19. οὐδὲν οὐ μὴ λήψῃ Hm 9:5.
    ⓕ w. one of two clauses that are either coordinate or contrasted.
    α. οὐ … ἀλλά s. ἀλλά 1ab.—1 Th 2:4 the οὐ w. the ptc. is prob. to be explained under this head (s. 3 above).
    β. οὐ …, … δέ Ac 12:9, 14; Hb 4:13, 15.
    γ. …, ἀλλʼ οὐ looking back upon a ‘to be sure’ 1 Cor 10:5, 23.
    δ. οὐ μόνον, ἀλλὰ (καί) s. μόνος 2c.
    ε. οὐ … εἰ μή s. εἰ 6i.
    ③ marker of expectation of an affirmative answer, not so?
    ⓐ to a direct question (Hom. et al.):
    α. do … not? does … not? (B-D-F §427, 2; Rob. 917): οὐκ ἀκούεις, πόσα σου καταμαρτυροῦσιν; you hear, do you not …? Mt 27:13. οὐχ ὑμεῖς μᾶλλον διαφέρετε αὐτῶν; 6:26. Cp. vs. 30. ὁ διδάσκαλος ὑμῶν οὐ τελεῖ δίδραχμα; your teacher pays the two-drachma tax, does he not? Mt 17:24.—Mk 6:3; 7:18; 12:24; Lk 11:40; J 4:35; 6:70; 7:25; Ac 9:21 and oft. οὐ μέλει σοι ὅτι ἀπολλύμεθα; does it make no difference to you that we are perishing? Mk 4:38. In a related sense
    β. destroying the force of the negation (cp. Hdt. et al.; Schwyzer II 598): Ac 4:20; 1 Cor 12:15 (B-D-F §431, 1; Rob. 1164).—In questions, if the verb itself is already negatived (by οὐ), the negation can be invalidated by the interrogative particle μή (s. μή 3a), which expects the answer ‘no’, so that the stage is set for an affirmative answer (Aesop, Fab. 374 P.=404aH. μὴ οὐκ ἔστι χλόη;=certainly there is grass, is there not?) μὴ οὐκ ἤκουσαν; surely they have heard, have they not? Ro 10:18; cp. vs. 19. μὴ οὐκ ἔχομεν ἐξουσίαν; we have the right, do we not? 1 Cor 9:4; cp. vs. 5. μὴ οἰκίας οὐκ ἔχετε; you have houses, do you not? 11:22.
    ⓑ to a question expressed impatiently in the second pers. of the fut. indic. and functioning as an imperative οὐ παύσῃ;=παῦσαι! will you not stop? = stop! Ac 13:10.—DELG. M-M.
    2
    οὐ μεν οὖν (so Aristoph., Plu. 870, Ran. 556; 1188; also οὐμενοῦν Paus. 1, 21, 1) adv. (Aristoph., Pla. et al.; incl. Luc., Jupp. Tr. 35 twice.—Kühner=G. II 158) a marker introducing a negative statement in contradiction of discourse that precedes, not at all, by no means (expressing a strong negation to a question) Dg 7:4.
    3
    οὐ μή s. μή 4.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > οὐ

  • 35 ἀκούω

    ἀκούω fut. ἀκούσω SibOr 4, 175; Mt 12:19; 13:14 (Is 6:9); J 5:25, 28; 10:16, ἀκούσομαι EpArist 5; Ac 3:22 (Dt 18:15); 28:28 (freq. w. vv.ll.); 1 aor. ἤκουσα; pf. ἀκήκοα; ptc. ἠκουκώς Hs 5, 4, 2. Pass.: fut. ἀκουσθήσομαι; 1 aor. ἠκούσθην; pf. 3 sg. ἤκουσται Dt 4:32 (Hom.+) ‘hear’, as a passive respondent to λέγω.
    ① lit. to have or exercise the faculty of hearing, hear
    ⓐ abs. τὰ ὦτα ἀκούουσιν Mt 13:16; κωφοὶ ἀ. 11:5; cp. Mk 7:37; Lk 7:22; τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἀ. be hard of hearing Mt 13:15 (Is 6:10); ἀκοῇ ἀ. Mt 13:14; Ac 28:26 (both Is 6:9). ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν they hear and yet do not hear Mt 13:13 (s. Aeschyl., Prom. 448 κλύοντες οὐκ ἤκουον; Demosth. 25 [Against Aristogeiton 1], 89, citing the maxim ὁρῶντας μὴ ὁρᾶν καὶ ἀκούοντας μὴ ἀκούειν), cp. Mk 8:18 (Ezk 12:2) and s. 7 below. In the protasis of a challenge to hearers, by which their attention is drawn to a special difficulty: ὁ ἔχων ὦτα (οὖς) ἀκούειν ἀκουέτω, w. variations (Arrian, Ind. 5, 1 ὅστις ἐθέλει φράζειν …, φραζέτω) Mt 11:15 v.l.; 13:9 v.l., 43 v.l.; Mk 4:9, 23; 7:15 [16] v.l.; Lk 8:8; 14:35 (EBishop, BT 7, ’56, 38–40); Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 13:9. Cp. Ox 1081 verso, 6–8; s. 7 below for the restored text. For the sense of the impv. in these challenges also s. 7. S. οὖς 2.
    ⓑ w. obj. (on the syntax B-D-F §173; 416, 1; Rob. 506f; on the LXX s. Johannessohn, Kasus, 36; Helbing, Kasussyntax 150ff).
    α. foll. by a thing as obj. in acc. (Diod S 8, 32, 1 τὶ something) Mt 11:4; 13:17ff; Lk 7:22; 1J 1:1, 3. τὴν φωνήν (UPZ 77 I, 25) Mt 12:19; J 3:8; Ac 22:9 (but see 7 below); 1 Cl 39:3 (Job 4:16); (pass. Mt 2:18 [Jer 38:15]; Rv 18:22). τὸν λόγον Mt 13:20ff; J 5:24. τοὺς λόγους, τὰ ῥήματα Mt 10:14; J 8:47 s. 4 below; Ac 2:22. πολέμους καὶ ἀκοὰς πολέμων Mt 24:6. τὴν βλασφημίαν 26:65. τὸν ἀσπασμόν Lk 1:41. ἄρρητα ῥήματα 2 Cor 12:4. τὸν ἀριθμόν Rv 9:16. τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν Hv 3, 12, 2. Pass. τὰ ἀκουσθέντα what has been heard i.e. the message Hb 2:1. ἠκούσθη ὁ λόγος εἰς τὰ ὦτα τῆς ἐκκλησίας … ἐν Ἰερουσαλήμ the report reached the ears of the church in Jerusalem Ac 11:22. Oft. the obj. is to be supplied fr. context Mt 13:17; Mk 4:15; J 6:60a; Ac 2:37; 8:30; 9:21; Ro 10:14. καθὼς ἀκούω = ἃ ἀ. J 5:30.
    β. τί τινος hear someth. fr. someone τὴν ἐπαγγελίαν, ἣν ἠκούσατέ μου the promise which you heard from me Ac 1:4. Still other constrs. occur, which are also poss. when the hearing is not directly fr. the mouth of the informant, but involves a report which one has received fr. the pers. in any way at all (s. below 3d). τὶ ἔκ τινος (Od. 15, 374; Hdt. 3, 62 ἐκ τοῦ κήρυκος) 2 Cor 12:6. τὶ παρά τινος (Soph., Oed. R. 7 παρʼ ἀγγέλων; Pla., Rep. 6, 506d; Demosth. 6, 26; Jer 30:8; Jos., Bell. 1, 529) J 8:26, 40 (τὴν ἀλήθειαν ἀ. as Diod S 16, 50, 2); 15:15; Ac 10:22; 28:22; 2 Ti 2:2; w. attraction of the relative λόγων ὧν παρʼ ἐμοῦ ἤκουσας teachings which you have heard from me 1:13; τὶ ἀπό τινος (Thu. 1, 125, 1) 1J 1:5. Hebraistically ἀπὸ τ. στόματός τινος Lk 22:71 (cp. ἐκ τ. στόμ. τ. Ex 23:13; Ezk 3:17; 33:7).
    γ. foll. by a thing as obj. in gen. (Hdt. 8, 135; X., Cyr. 3, 1, 8; Demosth. 18, 3; B-D-F §173, 2; Rob. 507) hear someth. τῆς βλασφημίας (= τὴν βλ. Mt 26:65) Mk 14:64. συμφωνίας καὶ χορῶν Lk 15:25; τῆς φωνῆς (BGU 1007, 11 [III B.C.] ἀκούσαντες φωνῆς) J 5:25, 28; Ac 9:7 (on the experience of Paul and his companions cp. Maximus Tyr. 9, 7d–f: some see a divine figure, others see nothing but hear a voice, still others both see and hear); 11:7; 22:7 (HMoehring, NovT 3, ’59, 80–99; s. Rob. 506). τῶν λόγων Lk 6:47. τῶν ῥημάτων J 12:47.
    ⓒ hear, listen to w. gen. of the pers. and a ptc. (Pla., Prot. 320b; X., Symp. 3, 13; Herm. Wr. 12, 8; Jos., Ant. 10, 105 ἤκουσε τοῦ προφήτου ταῦτα λέγοντος): ἠκούσαμεν αὐτοῦ λέγοντος we have heard him say Mk 14:58; ἀκοῦσαι προσευχομένου Παύλου AcPl Ha 2, 12. ἤκουον εἷς ἕκαστος … λαλούντων αὐτῶν each one heard them speaking Ac 2:6, 11; Rv 16:5, 7 (in vs. 7 the altar speaks); Hv 1, 3, 3. W. acc. instead of gen. πᾶν κτίσμα … καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς πάντα ἤκουσα λέγοντας (v.l. λέγοντα) Rv 5:13. Used without ptc. w. pronoun only: μου (Dio Chrys. 79 [28], 14) Mk 7:14; Ac 26:3. αὐτῶν Lk 2:46. αὐτοῦ vs. 47; 15:1; 19:48; 21:38; J 3:29 etc. ἡμῶν Ac 24:4.—ἀ. τινὸς περί τινος (since Hdt. 7, 209; IG II, 168 [338 B.C.]) hear someone (speak) about someth. Ac 17:32. ἤκουσεν αὐτοῦ περὶ τῆς … πίστεως he heard him speak about faith Ac 24:24, cp. Hm 11:7.—W. ὅτι foll. (X., Cyr. 3, 3, 18) J 14:28; Ac 22:2.—Abs. οἱ ἀκούοντες the hearers (Diod S 4, 7, 4) Lk 6:27; MPol 7:3. Esp. impv. ἄκουε listen! Mk 12:29 (Dt 6:4); Hs 5, 1, 3; pl. Mk 4:3. ἀκούσατε Ac 7:2; 13:16; AcPl Ha 8, 10. W. συνίετε listen and try to understand Mt 15:10.
    ② legal t.t. to hear a legal case, grant a hearing to someone (X., Hell. 1, 7, 9 al.; PAmh 135, 14; PIand 9, 10; 15; BGU 511 II, 2; POxy 1032, 59) w. παρά τινος: ἐὰν μὴ ἀκούσῃ πρῶτον παρʼ αὐτοῦ without first giving him a hearing J 7:51 (SPancaro, Biblica 53, ’72, 340–61).—Ac 25:22.
    ③ to receive news or information about someth., learn about someth.
    ⓐ abs. ἀκούσας δὲ ὁ Ἰησοῦς when Jesus learned about it (the death of J. Bapt.) Mt 14:13.—Mk 3:21; 6:14 (s. HLjungvik, ZNW 33, ’34, 90–92); Ro 10:18. W. ἀναγγέλλειν 15:21 (Is 52:15).
    ⓑ w. gen. of person οὗ οὐκ ἤκουσαν of whom they have not heard Ro 10:14a.—W. acc. of thing (X., Cyr. 1, 1, 4; Diod S 19, 8, 4; Chion, Ep. 12 ἀκ. τὴν τυραννίδα; Herodian 4, 4, 8) learn of τὴν ἀγάπην Phlm 5. τὴν ἀναστροφήν Gal 1:13. τὰ ἔργα τοῦ Χριστοῦ Mt 11:2. τὴν ἐνέδραν the ambush Ac 23:16: Χριστιανισμὸν ἀ. hear Christianity IPhld 6:1; τὴν οἰκονομίαν Eph 3:2. τὴν πίστιν 1:15; Col 1:4. τὴν ὑπομονήν Js 5:11.—Pass. ἀκούεται ἐν ὑμῖν πορνεία it is reported that there is immorality among you 1 Cor 5:1 (schol. on Nicander, Ther. 139 τοῦτο ἐξακούεται=this report is heard). ἐὰν ἀκουσθῇ τοῦτο ἐπὶ τοῦ ἡγεμόνος if this should come to the prefect’s ears Mt 28:14.
    ⓒ ἀ. τι περί τινος (since Hdt. 2, 43) learn someth. about someone Lk 9:9; 16:2.—ἀ. περί τινος (Jos., Vi. 246) Lk 7:3.
    ⓓ w. prep., to denote the author or source of the information (s. 1bβ) ἀ. τι παρά τινος: τῶν ἀκουσάντων παρὰ Ἰωάννου who had learned fr. John (who Jesus was) J 1:40, cp. 6:45 (Simplicius in Epict. p. 110, 35 τὸ ἀκοῦσαι παρὰ θεοῦ, ὅτι ἀθάνατός ἐστιν ἡ ψυχή); ἀ. τι ἔκ τινος: ἠκούσαμεν ἐκ τοῦ νόμου we have heard from the law (when it was read in the synagogue) J 12:34, where ἀ. approaches the technical sense learn (a body of authoritative teaching), as 1J 1:5 (s. above); 2:7, 24 et al. (OPiper, JBL 66, ’47, 437 n. 1). ἀ. ἀπό τινος περί τινος Ac 9:13.
    ⓔ w. ὅτι foll. (SIG 370, 21; PTebt 416, 8; BGU 246, 19; Josh l0:1; Da 5:14 Theod.; 1 Macc 6:55; 4 Macc 4:22; cp. the constr. ἀ. τινὰ ὅτι Od. 3, 193; X., Mem. 4, 2, 33) Mt 2:22; 4:12 al.—Pass. ἠκούσθη ὅτι ἐν οἴκῳ ἐστίν it became known that he was in the house Mk 2:1 (s. B-D-F §405, 2). οὐκ ἠκούσθη ὅτι it is unheard of that J 9:32.
    ⓕ w. acc. and inf. foll. (Hom. et al.; Jos., Ant. 11, 165; 13, 292) J 12:18; 1 Cor 11:18. W. acc. and ptc. (X., Cyr. 2, 4, 12; Herodian 2, 12, 4) Ac 7:12; 3J 4.
    ④ to give careful attention to, listen to, heed ἀ. τινός someone (Hom. et al.) ἀκούετε αὐτοῦ Mt 17:5; Lk 9:35; Ac 3:22 (all three Dt 18:15); cp. Mt 18:15; Lk 16:29, 31; J 10:8; Ac 4:19. W. acc. of thing J 8:47 (s. 1bα); PEg2 53f (restored).—Abs. (PsSol 2:8) obey, listen αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται Ac 28:28; cp. Mt 18:16; J 5:25b; agree 9:27a.
    ⑤ to pay attention to by listening, listen to ἀ. τινός someone/someth. (Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 14 I, 18; 461, 6) Mk 6:11; J 6:60b. Of God (Hom.+) Ac 7:34 (Ex 3:7); J 9:31; 11:41f; 1J 5:14f; AcPt Ox 849, 27.—Abs. καθὼς ἠδύναντο ἀ. as they were able to listen Mk 4:33 (EMolland, SymbOsl 8, 1929, 83–91; s. also 7 below).
    ⑥ to be given a nickname or other identifying label, be called (Demosth. 18, 46 κόλακες ἀκούουσι; Diog. L. 2, 111 a derisive nickname; 2, 140) ἤκουσαν προδόται γονέων they were called betrayers of their parents Hv 2, 2, 2.
    ⑦ to hear and understand a message, understand (Teles p. 47, 12; Galen: CMG Suppl. I p. 12, 29; Aelian, VH 13, 46; Apollon. Dysc., Syntax p. 295, 25 [Gramm. Gr. II/2 p. 424, 5 U.] ἀκούειν= συνιέναι τῶν ἠκουσμένων; Sext. Emp., Math. 1, 37 τὸ μὴ πάντας πάντων ἀκούειν; Julian, Orat. 4 p. 147a; PGM 3, 453 ἀκούσεις τὰ ὄρνεα λαλοῦντα; Philo, Leg. All. 2, 35) abs. (Is 36:11) 1 Cor 14:2. Perh. also Mk 4:33 (s. 5 above, and cp. Epict. 1, 29, 66 τ. δυναμένοις αὐτὰ ἀκοῦσαι). On the form of Lk 6:27a cp. Cleopatra 16, 57 ὑμῖν δὲ λέγω τοῖς εὖ φρονοῦσιν. W. acc. τὸν νόμον understand the law Gal 4:21; perh. Ac 22:9; 26:14 (s. 1bα above) belong here. Cp. also the play on words (1a above) ἀκούοντες οὐκ ἀκούουσιν Mt 13:13; cp. Mk 8:18. Here belong also the imperatives in Mt 11:15; 13:9, 43; Mk 4:9, 23; 7:15 [16] v.l.; Lk 8:8; 14:35; Rv 2:7, 11, 17, 29; 3:6, 13, 22; 13:9; also ὁ ἔχων ὦ[τ]α τ[ῶν ἀ]|περάντων [ἀ]κο[ύει?]ν ἀ|κουέτω one who has ears to hear the things that are without limits let him hear Ox 1081, 6–8, rev. on the basis of the Coptic, s. SJCh 89, 5f; cp. Borger, GGA 122.—ἀκούω is occasionally used as a perfective present: I hear= I have heard (so as early as Il. 24, 543; Aristoph., Frogs 426; X., An. 2, 5, 13, Mem. 2, 4, 1; 3, 5, 26; Pla., Rep. 583d; Theocr. 15, 23) Lk 9:9; 1 Cor 11:18; 2 Th 3:11. B-D-F §322.—B. 1037; 1339. DELG. M-M. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀκούω

  • 36 ἀπό

    ἀπό (Hom.+) prep. w. gen. (see the lit. on ἀνά, beg., also for ἀπό: KDieterich, IndogF 24, 1909, 93–158; LfgrE s.v.). Basic sense ‘separation from’ someone or someth., fr. which the other uses have developed. In the NT it has encroached on the domain of Att. ἐκ, ὑπό, παρά, and the gen. of separation; s. Mlt. 102; 246; Mlt-Turner 258f.
    ① a marker to indicate separation from a place, whether person or thing, from, away from
    ⓐ w. all verbs denoting motion, esp. those compounded w. ἀπό: ἀπάγεσθαι, ἀπαλλάσσεσθαι, ἀπελαύνειν, ἀπέρχεσθαι, ἀπολύεσθαι, ἀποπλανᾶσθαι, ἀποστέλλειν, ἀποφεύγειν, ἀποχωρεῖν, ἀποχωρίζεσθαι; but also w. ἀνίστασθαι, διαστῆναι, διέρχεσθαι, ἐκδημεῖν, ἐκκινεῖν, ἐκπλεῖν, ἐκπορεύεσθαι, ἐξέρχεσθαι, ἐξωθεῖν, ἐπιδιδόναι, μεταβαίνειν, μετατίθεσθαι, νοσφίζειν, παραγίνεσθαι, πλανᾶσθαι, πορεύεσθαι, ὑπάγειν, ὑποστρέφειν, φεύγειν; s. the entries in question.
    ⓑ w. all verbs expressing the idea of separation ἐκβάλλειν τὸ κάρφος ἀ. τοῦ ὀφθαλμοῦ remove the splinter fr. the eye Mt 7:4 v.l. (for ἐκ). ἐξέβαλον ἀπὸ τῆς πήρας αὐτῶν δῶρα they set forth gifts out of their travel bags GJs 21:3. ἀπολύεσθαι ἀ. ἀνδρός be divorced fr. her husband Lk 16:18, cp. Ac 15:33. ἀποκυλίειν, ἀπολαμβάνεσθαι, ἀποστρέφειν, ἐπιστρέφεσθαι, ἐπανάγειν, αἴρειν, ἀφαιρεῖν, ἀπολέσθαι, μερίζειν et al., s. the pertinent entries. So also κενὸς ἀ. τινος Hs 9, 19, 2. ἔρημος ἀ. τινος (Jer 51:2) 2 Cl 2:3. W. verbs which express the concept of separation in the wider sense, like loose, free, acquit et al. ἀπορφανίζειν, ἀποσπᾶν, διεγείρεσθαι, δικαιοῦν, ἐκδικοῦν, ἐλευθεροῦν, λούειν, λύειν, λυτροῦν, ῥαντίζειν, σαλεύειν, στέλλειν, σῴζειν, φθείρειν, s. the entries; hence also ἀθῷος (Sus 46 Theod. v.l.) Mt 27:24. καθαρὸς ἀ. τινος (Tob 3:14; but s. Dssm. NB 24 [BS 196; 216]) Ac 20:26; cp. Kuhring 54.
    ⓒ verbs meaning be on guard, be ashamed, etc., take ἀπό to express the occasion or object of their caution, shame, or fear; so αἰσχύνεσθαι, βλέπειν, μετανοεῖν, προσέχειν, φοβεῖσθαι, φυλάσσειν, φυλάσσεσθαι; s. 5 below.
    ⓓ w. verbs of concealing, hiding, hindering, the pers. from whom someth. is concealed is found w. ἀπό; so κρύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, παρακαλύπτειν τι ἀπό τινος, κωλύειν τι ἀπό τινος; s. the entries.
    ⓔ in pregnant constr. like ἀνάθεμα εἶναι ἀ. τοῦ Χριστοῦ be separated fr. Christ by a curse Ro 9:3. μετανοεῖν ἀ. τ. κακίας (Jer 8:6) Ac 8:22. ἀποθνῄσκειν ἀ. τινος through death become free from Col 2:20. φθείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. ἁπλότητος be ruinously diverted from wholehearted commitment 2 Cor 11:3. Cp. Hs 6, 2, 4.
    ⓕ as a substitute for the partitive gen. (Hdt. 6, 27, 2; Thu. 7, 87, 6; PPetr III, 11, 20; PIand 8, 6; Kuhring 20; Rossberg 22; Johannessohn, Präp. 17) τίνα ἀ. τῶν δύο; Mt 27:21, cp. Lk 9:38; 19:39 (like PTebt 299, 13; 1 Macc 1:13; 3:24; Sir 6:6; 46:8). τὰ ἀ. τοῦ πλοίου pieces of the ship Ac 27:44. ἐκχεῶ ἀ. τοῦ πνεύματός μου Ac 2:17f (Jo 3:1f). λαμβάνειν ἀ. τ. καρπῶν get a share of the vintage Mk 12:2 (cp. Just., A I, 65, 5 μεταλαβεῖν ἀπὸ τοῦ … ἄρτου).—Of foods (as in Da 1:13, 4:33a; 2 Macc 7:1) ἐσθίειν ἀ. τ. ψιχίων eat some of the crumbs Mt 15:27; Mk 7:28. χορτάζεσθαι ἀ. τινος eat one’s fill of someth. Lk 16:21. αἴρειν ἀ. τῶν ἰχθύων pick up the remnants of the fish Mk 6:43. ἐνέγκατε ἀ. τ. ὀψαρίων bring some of the fish J 21:10 (the only instance of this usage in J; s. M-EBoismard, Le chapitre 21 de Saint Jean: RB 54 [’47] 492).—Of drink (cp. Sir 26:12) πίνειν ἀπὸ τ. γενήματος τῆς ἀμπέλου drink the product of the vine Lk 22:18.
    ② to indicate the point from which someth. begins, whether lit. or fig.
    ⓐ of place from, out from (Just., D. 86, 1 ἀπὸ τῆς πέτρας ὕδωρ ἀναβλύσαν ‘gushing out of the rock’) σημεῖον ἀ. τ. οὐρανοῦ a sign fr. heaven Mk 8:11. ἀ. πόλεως εἰς πόλιν from one city to another Mt 23:34. ἀπʼ ἄκρων οὐρανῶν ἕως ἄκρων αὐτῶν (Dt 30:4; Ps 18:7) from one end of heaven to the other 24:31, cp. Mk 13:27. ἀπʼ ἄνωθεν ἕως κάτω from top to bottom Mt 27:51. ἀρξάμενοι ἀ. Ἰερουσαλήμ beginning in Jerusalem Lk 24:47 (s. also Lk 23:5; Ac 1:22; 10:37). ἀφʼ ὑμῶν ἐξήχηται ὁ λόγος τ. κυρίου the word of the Lord has gone out from you and sounded forth 1 Th 1:8. ἀπὸ βορρᾶ, ἀπὸ νότου in the north, in the south (PCairGoodsp 6, 5 [129 B.C.] ἐν τῷ ἀπὸ νότου πεδίῳ; Mitt-Wilck. I/2, 11A col. 1, 12f [123 B.C.] τὸ ἀπὸ νότου τῆς πόλεως χῶμα; ln. 7 ἀπὸ βορρᾶ τῆς πόλεως; 70, 16 al.; Josh 18:5; 19:34; 1 Km 14:5) Rv 21:13.
    ⓑ of time from … (on), since (POxy 523, 4; Mel., HE 4, 26, 8; s. Kuhring 54ff).
    α. ἀ. τῶν ἡμερῶν Ἰωάννου from the days of John Mt 11:12. ἀ. τῆς ὥρας ἐκείνης 9:22. ἀπʼ ἐκείνης τ. ἡμέρας (Jos., Bell. 4, 318, Ant. 7, 382) Mt 22:46; J 11:53. ἔτη ἑπτὰ ἀ. τῆς παρθενίας αὐτῆς for seven years fr. the time she was a virgin Lk 2:36. ἀ. ἐτῶν δώδεκα for 12 years 8:43. ἀ. τρίτης ὥρας τῆς νυκτός Ac 23:23. ἀ. κτίσεως κόσμου Ro 1:20. ἀ. πέρυσι since last year, a year ago 2 Cor 8:10; 9:2.—ἀπʼ αἰῶνος, ἀπʼ ἀρχῆς, ἀπʼ ἄρτι (also ἀπαρτί and ἄρτι), ἀπὸ καταβολῆς κόσμου, ἀπὸ τότε, ἀπὸ τοῦ νῦν; s. the pertinent entries.
    β. w. the limits defined, forward and backward: ἀπὸ … ἕως (Jos., Ant. 6, 364) Mt 27:45. ἀπὸ … ἄχρι Phil 1:5. ἀπὸ … μέχρι Ac 10:30; Ro 5:14; 15:19.
    γ. ἀφʼ ἧς (sc. ὥρας or ἡμέρας, which is found Col 1:6, 9; but ἀφʼ ἧς became a fixed formula: ParJer 7:28; Plut., Pelop. [285] 15, 5; s. B-D-F §241, 2) since Lk 7:45 (Renehan ’75, 36f); Ac 24:11; 2 Pt 3:4 (cp. X., Hell. 4, 6, 6; 1 Macc 1:11). ἀφʼ οὗ (sc.—as in X., Cyr. 1, 2, 13—χρόνου; Att. ins in Meisterhans.3-Schw. and s. Witkowski, index 163; ἀφʼ οὗ is also a formula) since, when once (X., Symp. 4, 62; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 1, 16 Jac.; Lucian, Dial. Mar. 15, 1; Ex 5:23 GrBar 3:6) Lk 13:25; 24:21; Rv 16:18 (cp. Da 12:1; 1 Macc 9:29; 16:24; 2 Macc 1:7; TestAbr B 13 p. 117, 23; GrBar; Jos., Ant. 4, 78). τρία ἔτη ἀφʼ οὗ (cp. Tob 5:35 S) Lk 13:7. ἀφότε s. ὅτε 1aγ end.
    ⓒ the beg. of a series from … (on).
    α. ἀρξάμενος ἀ. Μωϋσέως καὶ ἀ. πάντων τ. προφητῶν beginning w. Moses and all the prophets Lk 24:27. ἕβδομος ἀ. Ἀδάμ Jd 14 (Diod S 1, 50, 3 ὄγδοος ὁ ἀπὸ τοῦ πατρός [ancestor]; Appian, Mithrid. 9 §29 τὸν ἕκτον ἀπὸ τοῦ πρώτου Μιθριδάτην; Arrian, Anab. 7, 12, 4; Diog. L. 3, 1: Plato in the line of descent was ἕκτος ἀπὸ Σόλωνος; Biogr. p. 31: Homer δέκατος ἀπὸ Μουσαίου). ἀ. διετοῦς καὶ κατωτέρω Mt 2:16 (cp. Num 1:20; 2 Esdr 3:8).
    β. w. both beg. and end given ἀπὸ … ἕως (Sir 18:26; 1 Macc 9:13) Mt 1:17; 23:35; Ac 8:10. Sim., ἀ. δόξης εἰς δόξαν fr. glory to glory 2 Cor 3:18.
    ③ to indicate origin or source, from
    ⓐ lit., with verbs of motion
    α. down from πίπτειν ἀ. τραπέζης Mt 15:27. καθεῖλεν δυνάστας ἀ. θρόνων God has dethroned rulers Lk 1:52.
    β. from ἔρχεσθαι ἀ. θεοῦ J 3:2; cp. 13:3; 16:30. παραγίνεται ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας Mt 3:13; ἀ. ἀνατολῶν ἥξουσιν 8:11 (Is 49:12; 59:19); ἀ. τοῦ ἱεροῦ ἐπορεύετο 24:1; ἀ. Παμφυλίας Ac 15:38. ἐγείρεσθαι ἀ. τ. νεκρῶν be raised from the dead Mt 14:2.
    ⓑ lit., to indicate someone’s local origin from (Hom. et al.; Soph., El. 701; Hdt. 8, 114; ins [RevArch 4 sér. IV 1904 p. 9 ἀπὸ Θεσσαλονίκης]; pap [HBraunert, Binnenwanderung ’64, 384, s.v.; PFlor 14, 2; 15, 5; 17, 4; 22, 13 al.]; Judg 12:8; 13:2; 17:1 [all three acc. to B]; 2 Km 23:20 al.; Jos., Bell. 3, 422, Vi. 217; Just., A I, 1 τῶν ἀπὸ Φλαουί̈ας Νέας πόλεως; s. B-D-F §209, 3; Rob. 578) ἦν ἀ. Βηθσαϊδά he was from B. J 1:44; cp. 12:21. ὄχλοι ἀ. τῆς Γαλιλαίας crowds fr. Galilee Mt 4:25. ἄνδρες ἀ. παντὸς ἔθνους Ac 2:5. ἀνὴρ ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου a man fr. the crowd Lk 9:38. ὁ προφήτης ὁ ἀ. Ναζαρέθ Mt 21:11. οἱ ἀ. Κιλικίας the Cilicians Ac 6:9. οἱ ἀδελφοὶ οἱ ἀ. Ἰόππης 10:23 (Musaeus 153 παρθένος ἀπʼ Ἀρκαδίας; Just., A I, 58, 1 Μακρίωνα … τὸν ἀπὸ Πόντου). οἱ ἀ. Θεσσαλονίκης Ἰουδαῖοι 17:13. οἱ ἀ. τῆς Ἰταλίας the Italians Hb 13:24, who could be inside as well as outside Italy (cp. Dssm., Her. 33, 1898, 344, LO 167, 1 [LAE 200, 3]; Mlt. 237; B-D-F §437).—Rather denoting close association οἱ ἀ. τῆς ἐκκλησίας members of the church Ac 12:1; likew. 15:5 (cp. Plut., Cato Min. 4, 2 οἱ ἀπὸ τ. στοᾶς φιλόσοφοι; Ps.-Demetr. c. 68 οἱ ἀπʼ αὐτοῦ=his [Isocrates’] pupils; Synes., Ep. 4 p. 162b; 66 p. 206c; PTebt 33, 3 [112 B.C.], Ῥωμαῖος τῶν ἀπὸ συγκλήτου; Ar. 15, 1 Χριστιανοὶ γενεαλογοῦνται ἀπὸ … Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ; Ath.).—To indicate origin in the sense of material fr. which someth. is made (Hdt. 7, 65; Theocr. 15, 117; IPriene 117, 72 ἀπὸ χρυσοῦ; 1 Esdr 8:56; Sir 43:20 v.l.) ἔνδυμα ἀ. τριχῶν καμήλου clothing made of camel’s hair Mt 3:4.
    ⓒ fig., w. verbs of asking, desiring, to denote the pers. of or from whom a thing is asked (Ar. 11, 3): δανίσασθαι ἀπό τινος borrow fr. someone Mt 5:42. ἐκζητεῖν ἀ. τῆς γενεᾶς ταύτης Lk 11:51. ἀπαιτεῖν τι ἀπό τινος Lk 12:20. ζητεῖν τι ἀπό τινος 1 Th 2:6. λαμβάνειν τι ἀπό τινος Mt 17:25f; 3J 7.
    ⓓ fig., w. verbs of perceiving, to indicate source of the perception (Lysias, Andoc. 6; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6, 399b ἀπʼ αὐτῶν τῶν ἔργων θεωρεῖται ὁ θεός; Appian, Liby. 104 §493 ἀπὸ τῆς σφραγῖδος=[recognize a corpse] by the seal-ring; Demetr.: 722 Fgm. 2, 1 στοχάζεσθαι ἀπὸ τῶν ὀνομάτων; Just., D. 60, 1 τοῦτο νοοῦμεν ἀπὸ τῶν λόγων τῶν προλελεγμένων; 100, 2 ἀπὸ τῶν γραφῶν): ἀ. τῶν καρπῶν αὐτῶν ἐπιγνώσεσθε αὐτούς by their fruits you will know them Mt 7:16, 20. μανθάνειν παραβολὴν ἀ. τῆς συκῆς learn a lesson from the fig tree 24:32; Mk 13:28. ἀπὸ τῶν σπερμάτων μὴ ποιεῖσθαι τὴν παραβολήν if we are not to derive our parable solely from reference to seeds (cp. 1 Cor 15:37) AcPlCor 2:28.—Also μανθάνειν τι ἀπό τινος learn someth. fr. someone Gal 3:2; Col 1:7.
    ⓔ γράψαι ἀφʼ ὧν ἠδυνήθην, lit., write from what I was able, i.e. as well as I could B 21:9 (cp. Tat. 12, 5 οὐκ ἀπὸ γλώττης οὐδὲ ἀπὸ τῶν εἰκότων οὐδὲ ἀπʼ ἐννοιῶν etc.).
    ④ to indicate distance fr. a point, away from, for μακρὰν ἀ. τινος far fr. someone, ἀπὸ μακρόθεν fr. a great distance s. μακράν, μακρόθεν. ἀπέχειν ἀπό τινος s. ἀπέχω 4. W. detailed measurements (corresp. to Lat. ‘a’, s. B-D-F §161, 1; Rob. 575; WSchulze, Graeca Latina 1901, 15ff; Hdb. on J 11:18; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 12 §42; CB I/2, 390 no. 248) ἦν Βηθανία ἐγγὺς τῶν Ἱεροσολύμων ὡς ἀπὸ σταδίων δεκατέντε Bethany was near Jerusalem, about 15 stades (less than 3 km.) away J 11:18. ὡς ἀπὸ πηχῶν διακοσίων about 200 cubits (c. 90 meters) 21:8. ἀπὸ σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων about 1600 stades (c. 320 km.) Rv 14:20; cp. Hv 4, 1, 5 (for other examples of this usage, s. Rydbeck 68).—Hebraistically ἀπὸ προσώπου τινός (Gen 16:6; Jer 4:26; Jdth 2:14; Sir 21:2; 1 Macc 5:34; En 103:4; Just., A I, 37, 1 ἀπὸ προσώπου τοῦ πατρὸς ἐλέχθησαν διὰ Ἠσαίου … οἵδε οἱ λόγοι ‘in the name of the father … through Isaiah’; 38, 1 al.)=מִפְּנֵי פ׳ ( away) from the presence of someone 2 Th 1:9 (Is 2:10, 19, 21); Rv 12:14 (B-D-F §140; 217, 1; Mlt-H. 466).
    ⑤ to indicate cause, means, or outcome
    ⓐ gener., to show the reason for someth. because of, as a result of, for (numerous ref. in FBleek on Hb 5:7; PFay 111, 4; POxy 3314, 7 [from falling off a horse]; Jdth 2:20; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010]; AscIs 3:13; Jos., Ant. 9, 56) οὐκ ἠδύνατο ἀ. τοῦ ὄχλου he could not because of the crowd Lk 19:3; cp. Mk 2:4 D. οὐκ ἐνέβλεπον ἀπὸ τῆς δόξης τοῦ φωτός I could not see because of the brilliance of the light Ac 22:11. ἀ. τοῦ πλήθους τ. ἰχθύων J 21:6 (M-EBoismard, ad loc.: s. 1f end). ἀ. τοῦ ὕδατος for the water Hs 8, 2, 8. ἀ. τῆς θλίψεως because of the persecution Ac 11:19. οὐαὶ τῷ κόσμῳ ἀ. τ. σκανδάλων Mt 18:7 (s. B-D-F §176, 1; Mlt. 246). εἰσακουσθεὶς ἀ. τῆς εὐλαβείας heard because of his piety Hb 5:7 (but the text may be corrupt; at any rate it is obscure and variously interpr.; besides the comm. s. KRomaniuk, Die Gottesfürchtigen im NT: Aegyptus 44, ’64, 84; B-D-F §211; Rob. 580; s. on εὐλάβεια).
    ⓑ to indicate means with the help of, with (Hdt. et al.; Ael. Aristid. 37, 23 K.=2 p. 25 D.; PGM 4, 2128f σφράγιζε ἀπὸ ῥύπου=seal with dirt; En 97:8) γεμίσαι τὴν κοιλίαν ἀ. τ. κερατίων fill one’s stomach w. the husks Lk 15:16 v.l. (s. ἐκ 4aζ; cp. Pr 18:20). οἱ πλουτήσαντες ἀπʼ αὐτῆς Rv 18:15 (cp. Sir 11:18).
    ⓒ to indicate motive or reason for, from, with (Appian, Bell. Civ. 5, 13 §52 ἀπʼ εὐνοίας=with goodwill; 1 Macc 6:10; pap exx. in Kuhring 35) κοιμᾶσθαι ἀ. τῆς λύπης sleep from sorrow Lk 22:45. ἀ. τῆς χαρᾶς αὐτοῦ Mt 13:44; cp. Lk 24:41; Ac 12:14. ἀ. τοῦ φόβου κράζειν Mt 14:26, ἀ. φόβου καὶ προσδοκίας with fear and expectation Lk 21:26. Hence verbs of fearing, etc., take ἀ. to show the cause of the fear (s. above 1c) μὴ φοβεῖσθαι ἀ. τ. ἀποκτεννόντων τὸ σῶμα not be afraid of those who kill only the body Mt 10:28; Lk 12:4 (cp. Jdth 5:23; 1 Macc 2:62; 3:22; 8:12; En 106:4).
    ⓓ to indicate the originator of the action denoted by the verb from (Trag., Hdt. et al.) ἀ. σοῦ σημεῖον ἰδεῖν Mt 12:38. γινώσκειν ἀπό τινος learn fr. someone Mk 15:45. ἀκούειν ἀ. τοῦ στόματός τινος hear fr. someone’s mouth, i.e. fr. him personally Lk 22:71 (Dionys. Hal. 3, 8 ἀ. στόματος ἤκουσεν); cp. Ac 9:13; 1J 1:5. τὴν ἀ. σοῦ ἐπαγγελίαν a promise given by you Ac 23:21 (cp. Ath. 2, 3 ταῖς ἀπὸ τῶν κατηγόρων αἰτίαις ‘the charges made by the accusers’). ἀφʼ ἑνὸς ἐγενήθησαν Hb 11:12. Prob. παραλαμβάνειν ἀ. τοῦ κυρίου 1 Cor 11:23 is to be understood in the same way: Paul is convinced that he is taught by the Lord himself (for direct teaching s. EBröse, Die Präp. ἀπό 1 Cor 11:23: StKr 71, 1898, 351–60; Dssm.; BWeiss; Ltzm.; H-DWendland. But for indirect communication: Zahn et al.). παραλαβὼν ἀπὸ τῶν θυγατέρων Φιλίππου, ὅτι Papias (11:2); opp. παρειληφέναι ὑπὸ τῶν θ. Φ. (2:9).—Of the more remote cause ἀπʼ ἀνθρώπων from human beings (as opposed to transcendent revelation; w. διʼ ἀνθρώπου; cp. Artem. 1, 73 p. 66, 11 ἀπὸ γυναικῶν ἢ διὰ γυναικῶν; 2, 36 p. 135, 26) Gal 1:1. ἀ. κυρίου πνεύματος fr. the Lord, who is the Spirit 2 Cor 3:18. ἔχειν τι ἀπό τινος have (received) someth. fr. someone 1 Cor 6:19; 1 Ti 3:7; 1J 2:20; 4:21.—In salutation formulas εἰρήνη ἀ. θεοῦ πατρός ἡμῶν peace that comes from God, our father Ro 1:7; 1 Cor 1:3; 2 Cor 1:2; Gal 1:3; Eph 1:2; cp. 6:23; Phil 1:2; Col 1:2; 1 Th 1:1 v.l.; 2 Th 1:2; 1 Ti 1:2; 2 Ti 1:2; Tit 1:4; Phlm 3. σοφία ἀ. θεοῦ wisdom that comes fr. God 1 Cor 1:30. ἔπαινος ἀ. θεοῦ praise fr. God 4:5. καὶ τοῦτο ἀ. θεοῦ and that brought about by God Phil 1:28. The expr. εἰρήνη ἀπὸ ‘ὁ ὢν καὶ ὁ ἦν καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος’ Rv 1:4 is quite extraordinary. It may be an interpretation of the name Yahweh already current, or an attempt to show reverence for the divine name by preserving it unchanged, or simply one more of the grammatical peculiarities so frequent in Rv (Meyer6-Bousset 1906, 159ff; Mlt. 9, note 1; cp. PParis 51, 33 ἀπὸ ἀπηλιότης; Mussies 93f, 328).
    ⓔ to indicate responsible agents for someth., from, of
    α. the self, st. Gk. usage (Thu. 5, 60, 1; X., Mem. 2, 10, 3; Andoc., Orat. 2, 4 οὗτοι οὐκ ἀφʼ αὑτῶν ταῦτα πράττουσιν; Diod S 17, 56; Num 16:28; 4 Macc 11:3; En 98:4; TestAbr A 15 p. 95, 26 [Stone p. 38]; 18 p. 101, 6 [Stone p. 50]; Just., A I, 43, 8) the expr. ἀφʼ ἑαυτοῦ (pl. ἀφʼ ἑαυτῶν) of himself and ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ of myself are common Lk 12:57; 21:30; 2 Cor 3:5, esp. so in J: 5:19, 30; 8:28; 10:18; 15:4.—7:17f; 11:51; 14:10; 16:13; 18:34. So also ἀπʼ ἐμαυτοῦ οὐκ ἐλήλυθα I did not come of myself (opp. the Father sent me) 7:28; 8:42.
    β. fr. others. W. verbs in the pass. voice or pass. mng. ὑπό is somet. replaced by ἀπό (in isolated cases in older Gk. e.g. Thu. 1, 17 et al. [Kühner-G. II/1 p. 457f]; freq. in later Gk.: Polyb. 1, 79, 14; Hero I 152, 6; 388, 11; Nicol. Dam.: 90 Fgm. 130, 130 Jac.; IG XII/5, 29, 1; SIG 820, 9; PLond III, 1173, 12 p. 208; BGU 1185, 26; PFlor 150, 6 ἀ. τῶν μυῶν κατεσθιόμενα; PGM 4, 256; Kuhring 36f; 1 Macc 15:17; Sir 16:4; ParJer 1:1 ᾐχμαλωτεύθησαν … ἀπὸ τοῦ βασιλέως; Philo, Leg. All. 3, 62; Just., A I, 68, 6 ἐπιστολὴν … γραφεῖσάν μοι ἀπὸ Σερήνου, D. 121, 3 ἀπὸ παντὸς [γένους] μετάνοιαν πεποιῆσθαι. See B-D-F §210; Rob. 820; GHatzidakis, Einl. in d. neugriech. Gramm. 1892, 211; AJannaris, An Histor. Gk. Grammar 1897, §1507). Yet just at this point the textual tradition varies considerably, and the choice of prep. is prob. at times influenced by the wish to express special nuances of mng. Lk 8:29b v.l. (ὑπό text); 43b (ὑπό v.l.); 10:22 D; ἀποδεδειγμένος ἀ. τ. θεοῦ attested by God Ac 2:22. ἐπικληθεὶς Βαρναβᾶς ἀ. (ὑπό v.l.) τ. ἀποστόλων named B. by the apostles 4:36. κατενεχθεὶς ἀ. τοῦ ὕπνου overcome by sleep 20:9. ἀθετούμενος ἀπὸ τῶν παραχαρασσόντων τὰ λόγια αὐτοῦ inasmuch as (Jesus) is being rejected by those who falsify his words AcPlCor 2:3. νεκροῦ βληθέντος ἀπὸ τῶν υἱῶν Ἰσραὴλ ἐπʼ αὐτά when a corpse was cast upon them (the bones of Elisha) 2:32. In such cases ἀπό freq. denotes the one who indirectly originates an action, and can be transl. at the hands of, by command of: πολλὰ παθεῖν ἀ. τ. πρεσβυτέρων suffer much at the hands of the elders Mt 16:21; cp. Lk 9:22; 17:25, where the emphasis is to be placed on παθεῖν, not on ἀποδοκιμασθῆναι. In ἀ. θεοῦ πειράζομαι the thought is that the temptation is caused by God, though not actually carried out by God Js 1:13. ἡτοιμασμένος ἀ. τοῦ θεοῦ prepared by God’s command, not by God in person Rv 12:6.
    ⑥ In a few expr. ἀπό helps to take the place of an adverb. ἀπὸ μέρους, s. μέρος 1c.—ἡμέρᾳ ἀφʼ ἡμέρας day by day GJs 12:3.—ἀπὸ μιᾶς (acc. to Wlh., Einl.2 26, an Aramaism, min ḥădā˒=at once [s. MBlack, An Aramaic Approach3, ’67, 113]; but this does not explain the fem. gender, found also in the formulaic ἐπὶ μιᾶς Maxim. Tyr. 6, 3f En 99:9 [s. SAalen, NTS 13, ’67, 3] and in Mod. Gk. μὲ μιᾶς at once [Thumb §162 note 2]. PSI 286, 22 uses ἀπὸ μιᾶς of a payment made ‘at once’; on the phrase s. New Docs 2, 189. Orig. γνώμης might have been a part of the expr. [Philo, Spec. Leg. 3, 73], or ὁρμῆς [Thu. 7, 71, 6], or γλώσσης [Cass. Dio 44, 36, 2], or φωνῆς [Herodian 1, 4, 8]; cp. ἀπὸ μιᾶς φωνῆς Plut., Mor. 502d of an echo; s. B-D-F §241, 6) unanimously, alike, in concert Lk 14:18. Sim. ἀπὸ τ. καρδιῶν fr. (your) hearts, sincerely Mt 18:35.—Himerius, Or. 39 [=Or. 5], 6 has as a formula διὰ μιᾶς, probably = continuously, uninterruptedly, Or. 44 [=Or. 8], 2 fuller διὰ μιᾶς τῆς σπουδῆς=with one and the same, or with quite similar zeal.—M-M.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἀπό

  • 37 νοῦς

    νοῦς, νοός, νοί̈, νοῦν, ὁ (contracted fr. νόος.—Hom. et al.; pap, LXX, TestSol, Test12Patr; SibOr 3, 574; EpArist 276; Philo [oft.]; Jos., Ant. 3, 65, Vi. 122 al.; apolog. exc. Mel.—On its declension s. B-D-F §52; W-S. §8, 11; Mlt-H. 127; 142) in the NT only in Pauline lit. except for Lk 24:45; Rv 13:18; 17:9.
    ⓐ mind, intellect as the side of life contrasted w. physical existence, the higher, mental part of a human being that initiates thoughts and plans (Apollonius of Tyana [I A.D.] in Eus., PE 4, 13; Orig., C. Cels. 8, 38, 21; 52, 24; Did., Gen. 57, 26): ὁ νόμος τοῦ νοός (μου) the law of (my) intellect Ro 7:22 v.l., 23. (Opp. σάρξ) τῷ ν. δουλεύειν νόμῳ θεοῦ serve the law of God w. one’s intellect vs. 25.
    ⓑ understanding, mind as faculty of thinking (Hippol., Ref. 4, 43, 2; Did., Gen. 44, 11 [w. λογισμός]) διανοίγειν τὸν ν. τινος open someone’s mind Lk 24:45. ὁ ἔχων νοῦν whoever has understanding Rv 13:18 (ν. ἔχειν as Aristoph., Equ. 482; Hyperid. 3, 23; Dio Chrys. 17 [34], 39; 23 [40], 26; Ael. Aristid. 23, 12 K.=42 p. 771 D.; EpArist 276; Philo, Mos. 1, 141; TestReub 3:8; Ar. 9, 5; Just., D. 30, 1; 60, 2; Tat. 1, 2). ὧδε ὁ ν. ὁ ἔχων σοφίαν here is (i.e. this calls for) a mind with wisdom 17:9. νοῦν διδόναι grant understanding Dg 10:2. Also παρέχειν νοῦν 11:5. ὁ σοφίαν καὶ νοῦν θέμενος ἐν ἡμῖν τῶν κρυφίων αὐτοῦ who has placed in us wisdom and understanding of his secrets 6:10. ποικίλος τῇ φρονήσει καὶ τῷ ν. diverse in thought and understanding Hs 9, 17, 2a; cp. vs. 2b. Of the peace of God ἡ ὑπερέχουσα πάντα ν. which surpasses all power of thought Phil 4:7. In contrast to the divine Pneuma which inspires the ‘speaker in tongues’: ὁ ν. μου ἄκαρπός ἐστιν my mind is unfruitful, because it remains inactive during the glossolalia 1 Cor 14:14. προσεύχεσθαι τῷ ν. (opp. τῷ πνεύματι.—νόῳ as instrumental dat. as Pind., P. 1, 40) pray w. the understanding vs. 15a; ψάλλειν τῷ ν. vs. 15b. θέλω πέντε λόγους τῷ ν. μου λαλῆσαι I would rather speak five words w. my understanding vs. 19 (cp. 1QS 10:9).—As a designation of Christ (cp. SibOr 8, 284) in a long series of expressions (w. φῶς) Dg 9:6 (cp. Epict. 2, 8, 2 τίς οὖν οὐσία θεοῦ; νοῦς, ἐπιστήμη, λόγος ὀρθός. Theoph. Ant. 1, 3 [p. 62, 14] νοῦν ἐὰν εἴπω, φρόνησιν αὐτοῦ [sc. τοῦ θεοῦ] λέγω; Ath. 10, 2 νοῦς καὶ λόγος τοῦ πατρὸς ὁ υἱὸς τοῦ θεοῦ. The god Νοῦς in the Herm. Wr.: Rtzst., Mysterienrel3 47 al.; JKroll, D. Lehren des Hermes Trismegistos 1914, 10ff; 60ff al.; PGM 5, 465 ὁ μέγας Νοῦς; Iren. 1, 1, 1 [Harv. I 9, 7], 1, 2, 1 [Harv. I 13, 7]: names of Aeons in gnostic speculation).—Also the state of sensibleness, composure in contrast to the disturbances of soul brought about by the expectation of the Parousia, σαλευθῆναι ἀπὸ τοῦ νοός be shaken, and thereby lose your calmness of mind 2 Th 2:2.
    ② way of thinking, mind, attitude, as the sum total of the whole mental and moral state of being (Just., A I, 15, 16)
    ⓐ as possessed by every person μεταμορφοῦσθαι τῇ ἀνακαινώσει τοῦ ν. be transformed by the renewing of the mind, which comes about when Christians have their natural νοῦς penetrated and transformed by the Spirit which they receive at baptism Ro 12:2 (s. Ltzm., Hdb. ad loc.). W. the same sense ἀνανεοῦσθαι τῷ πνεύματι τοῦ ν. ὑμῶν you must adopt a new attitude of mind Eph 4:23 (the piling up of synonyms is a distinctive feature of Eph; s. MDibelius, Hdb. exc. on Eph 1:14). Of polytheists παρέδωκεν αὐτοὺς ὁ θεὸς εἰς ἀδόκιμον ν. God abandoned them to depraved thoughts Ro 1:28. τὰ ἔθνη περιπατεῖ ἐν ματαιότητι τοῦ ν. αὐτῶν the nations/gentiles live w. their minds fixed on futile things Eph 4:17. Of one who is in error: εἰκῇ φυσιούμενος ὑπὸ τοῦ ν. τῆς σαρκὸς αὐτοῦ groundlessly conceited (lit. ‘puffed up’) by his mind, fixed on purely physical things Col 2:18. κατεφθαρμένος τὸν ν. with depraved mind 2 Ti 3:8; also διεφθαρμένος τὸν ν. 1 Ti 6:5 (B-D-F §159, 3; Rob. 486). μεμίανται αὐτῶν καὶ ὁ ν. καὶ ἡ συνείδησις their minds and consciences are unclean Tit 1:15. ὁ ν. αὐτῶν περὶ τὴν πρᾶξιν αὐτῶν καταγίνεται their mind is fixed on their own business Hm 10, 1, 5.
    ⓑ specif. of the Christian attitude or way of thinking κατηρτισμένοι ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοί̈ 1 Cor 1:10. Through baptism believers receive μίαν φρόνησιν καὶ ἕνα νοῦν Hs 9, 17, 4; cp. 9, 18, 4. εἷς νοῦς, μία ἐλπίς is to rule in the church IMg 7:1.
    ③ result of thinking, mind, thought, opinion, decree (Hom. et al. of gods and humans; cp. Hippol., Ref. 9, 10, 8) ἕκαστος ἐν τῷ ἰδίῳ ν. πληροφορείσθω each pers. is to be fully convinced in his own mind Ro 14:5. τίς γὰρ ἔγνω νοῦν κυρίου; who has known the Lord’s thoughts? (Is 40:13) 11:34; 1 Cor 2:16a. When Paul continues in the latter passage vs. 16b w. ἡμεῖς νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν, he is using the scriptural word νοῦς to denote what he usu. calls πνεῦμα (vs. 14f). He can do this because his νοῦς (since he is a ‘pneumatic’ person) is filled w. the Spirit (s. 2a above), so that in his case the two are interchangeable. Such a νοῦς is impossible for a ‘psychic’ person.—OMoe, Vernunft u. Geist im NT: ZST 11, ’34, 351–91; RJewett, Paul’s Anthropological Terms, ’71, 358–90; TKrischer, Glotta 62, ’84, 141–49. S. καρδία end; νοέω end.—B. 1198. DELG s.v. νόος. Schmidt, Syn. III 621–55. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > νοῦς

  • 38 πᾶς

    πᾶς, πᾶσα, πᾶν gen. παντός, πάσης, παντός (dat. pl. πᾶσι and πᾶσιν vary considerably in the mss.; s. W-S. §5, 28; cp. Rob. 219–21; on the use of the art. s. B-D-F §275) (Hom. +).
    ① pert. to totality with focus on its individual components, each, every, any
    ⓐ adj., used w. a noun without the art.
    α. in the sing. emphasizing the individual members of the class denoted by the noun every, each, any, scarcely different in mng. fr. the pl. ‘all’: πᾶν δένδρον Mt 3:10; Lk 3:9. πᾶσα φυτεία Mt 15:13. πᾶσα φάραγξ, πᾶν ὄρος Lk 3:5 (Is 40:4). πᾶς τόπος 4:37. πᾶς ἄνθρωπος J 1:9; 2:10; Ro 3:4 (Ps 115:2); Gal 5:3; Col 1:28abd; Js 1:19. πᾶσα γυνή GJs 11:2. πᾶν ἔθνος Ac 17:26a. πᾶσα ψυχή (Pla., Phdr. 249e) 2:43; 3:23 (cp. Lev 23:29); Ro 2:9; Jd 15. πᾶσα ἡμέρα Ac 5:42; 17:17. πᾶν σάββατον 18:4. πᾶσα ἀρχὴ καὶ πᾶσα ἐξουσία 1 Cor 15:24 (cp. Just., D. 111, 2 οὗ τὸ ὄνομα πᾶσα ἀρχὴ δέδιεν). πᾶσα συνείδησις 2 Cor 4:2. πᾶς ἅγιος Phil 4:21. πᾶς οἶκος Hb 3:4 (GJs 7:3). πᾶσα ἀντιλογία 7:7. πᾶσα παιδεία all discipline 12:11. πᾶς ὀφθαλμός Rv 1:7a. πᾶν κτίσμα 5:13a.—Mt 23:35; Lk 2:23 (Ex 13:2); 4:13; 21:36; 2 Th 2:4 (Da 11:36). πᾶσα κτίσις every creature Col 1:15; ἐν πάσῃ κτίσει to every creature vs. 23. πᾶσα γραφή 2 Ti 3:16 (s. γραφή 2a).—πᾶσα σάρξ (כָּל־בָּשָׂר; used in the OT, also En 1:9; TestGad 7:2; GrBar 4:10; but not in EpArist, Philo, nor Joseph.) all flesh Lk 3:6 (Is 40:5); AcPlCor 2:6 and 16 (s. also 3b below). Mostly w. a neg. (so also En 14:21; 17:6) οὐ (or μή) … πᾶσα σάρξ no flesh = no one Mt 24:22; Mk 13:20; Ro 3:20; 1 Cor 1:29; Gal 2:16 (cp. GrBar 8:7 οὐκ ἂν ἐσώθη πᾶσα πνοή). Other sim. neg. expressions are also Hebraistic (s. B-D-F §302, 1; Mlt-H. 433f) οὐ … πᾶν ῥῆμα not a thing, nothing Lk 1:37 (cp. PRyl 113, 12f [133 A.D.] μὴ … πᾶν πρᾶγμα). οὐδέποτε ἔφαγον πᾶν κοινόν I have never eaten anything common Ac 10:14. Cp. Rv 7:1, 16; 9:4; 21:27. Also in reverse order, πᾶς … οὐ or μή (Ex 12:16; Sir 8:19; 10:6, but s. also GLee, ET 63, ’51f, 156) 18:22; Eph 4:29; 5:5; 2 Pt 1:20; 1J 2:21; 3:15b.—Only rarely is a ptc. used w. πᾶς in this way: παντὸς ἀκούοντος when anyone hears Mt 13:19. παντὶ ὀφείλοντι Lk 11:4 (Mlt-Turner 196f).
    β. w. a noun in the pl., without the art. πάντες ἄνθρωποι all people/men, everyone (Lysias 12, 60; Andoc. 3, 25; X., Cyr. 7, 5, 52, Mem. 4, 4, 19; Demosth. 8, 5; 18, 72) Ac 22:15; Ro 5:12a, 18ab; 12:17, 18; 1 Cor 7:7; 15:19; 2 Cor 3:2; Phil 4:5; 1 Th 2:15; 1 Ti 2:4; 4:10; Tit 2:11. πάντες ἄγγελοι θεοῦ Hb 1:6 (Dt 32:43; cp. Demosth. 18, 294 πάντες θεοί).
    ⓑ adj. used with a noun or ptc. with the art.
    α. in the sing. Oft. πᾶς ὁ, πάσα ἡ, πᾶν τό is used w. a ptc. (B-D-F §413, 2 and 3) every one who, whoever πᾶς ὁ (Soph., Aj. 152; Demosth. 23, 97; Sir 22:2, 26; 1 Macc 1:52; 2:27) πᾶς ὁ ὀργιζόμενος Mt 5:22. Cp. vss. 28, 32; 7:8, 26 (=πᾶς ὅστις vs. 24; s. below); Lk 6:47; 11:10; 14:11; 16:18; 18:14; 19:26; J 3:8, 15f, 20; 4:13; 6:40; 8:34; 18:37; Ac 10:43b; 13:39; Ro 2:1, 10; 10:4, 11; 1 Cor 9:25; Gal 3:13; 2 Ti 2:19; Hb 5:13; 1J 2:23, 29 al.; 2J 9; Rv 22:18.—πᾶν τό everything that (1 Macc 10:41): πᾶν τὸ εἰσπορευόμενον Mt 15:17; Mk 7:18. πᾶν τὸ ὀφειλόμενον Mt 18:34. πᾶν τὸ πωλούμενον 1 Cor 10:25; cp. vs. 27. πᾶν τὸ φανερούμενον Eph 5:14. πᾶν τὸ γεγεννημένον 1J 5:4.—An equivalent of this expr. is πᾶς ὅς (or ὅστις), πᾶν ὅ every one who, whatever (s. above and s. B-D-F §293, 1; 413, 2; Rob. 727; 957), masc.: Mt 7:24; 10:32; 19:29; Lk 12:8, 10 (RHolst, ZNW 63, ’72, 122–24), 48; 14:33; Ac 2:21 (πᾶς ὸ̔ς ἐάν, s. Jo 2:32); Ro 10:13 (πᾶς ὸ̔ς ἄν, s. Jo 3:5); Gal 3:10. Neut. (Jdth 12:14.—Jos., Ant. 5, 211 πᾶν ὅ = πάντες οἱ): J 6:37, 39; 17:2b; Ro 14:23; Col 3:17 (πᾶν ὅ τι ἐάν).
    β. w. a noun in the pl., w. the art. all
    א. w. substantives: πᾶσαι αἱ γενεαί Mt 1:17; Lk 1:48; Eph 3:21; GJs 6:2 al. πάντας τοὺς ἀρχιερεῖς Mt 2:4. Cp. vs. 16; 4:8; 11:13; Mk 4:13, 31f; 6:33; Lk 1:6; 2:51; 6:26; J 18:20; Ac 1:18; 3:18; 10:12, 43a; 14:16; Ro 1:5; 15:11 (Ps 116:1); 16:4; 1 Cor 12:26ab; 2 Cor 8:18; 11:28; Eph 4:10; 6:16b; Col 2:13; 1 Ti 6:10; Hb 4:4 (Gen 2:2 and 3); 9:21; Js 1:8; Rv 1:7b; 7:11; 15:4 al.—Used w. a demonstr. pron.: πᾶσαι αἱ παρθένοι ἐκεῖναι Mt 25:7. πάντας τοὺς λόγους τούτους 26:1. πάντα τὰ ῥήματα ταῦτα Lk 1:65; 2:19.—Somet. following the noun: τὰς πόλεις πάσας Mt 9:35; Ac 8:40. οἱ μαθηταὶ πάντες the disciples, one and all Mt 26:56. αἱ θύραι πᾶσαι Ac 16:26a. Cp. Ro 16:16; 1 Cor 7:17; 13:2a; 15:7; 16:20; 1 Th 5:26; 2 Ti 4:21; Rv 8:3. οἱ Ἱεροσολυμῖται πάντες Mk 1:5.—On the position of ἐκεῖνος, ἕνεκα, πᾶς s. NTurner, VetusT 5, ’55, 208–13.
    ב. w. participles πάντες οἱ: πάντες οἱ κακῶς ἔχοντες Mt 4:24. πάντες οἱ κοπιῶντες 11:28; cp. 21:12; 26:52; Lk 1:66; 2:47; 13:17; Ac 1:19; 2:44; 4:16; 5:5, 11; 6:15; 9:14; 28:30; Ro 1:7; 4:11; 1 Cor 1:2; Eph 6:24; 1 Th 1:7; 2 Th 1:10; 2 Ti 3:12; 4:8; Hb 5:9; 13:24; 2J 1; Rv 13:8; 18:24. Following the ptc. οἱ κατοικοῦντες πάντες Ac 2:14. ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πᾶσιν 20:32.—πάντα τά: πάντα τὰ γενόμενα Mt 18:31. πάντα τὰ ὑπάρχοντα 24:47; Lk 12:44; 1 Cor 13:3. Cp. Lk 17:10; 18:31; 21:36; J 18:4; Ac 10:33b. Used w. a demonstr. pron.: περὶ πάντων τῶν συμβεβηκότων τούτων Lk 24:14. Following: τὰ γινόμενα πάντα 9:7.
    ג. w. prepositional expressions, w. which ὄντες (ὄντα) is to be supplied (TestAbr A 4 p. 81, 24 [Stone p. 10] πάντα τὰ ἐπὶ τῆς τραπέζης; 4 [6] Esdr [POxy 1010] πάντες σου οἱ ἐν τοῖς πεδίοις): πάντες οἱ ἐν τῇ οἰκίᾳ Mt 5:15; Ac 16:32. πάντες οἱ σὺν αὐτῷ Lk 5:9. πάντες οἱ ἐν τοῖς μνημείοις J 5:28. πάντες οἱ εἰς μακράν Ac 2:39. Cp. 5:17. πάντες οἱ ἐξ Ἰσραήλ Ro 9:6. Cp. 2 Ti 1:15; 1 Pt 5:14. πάντα τὰ ἐν αὐτοῖς Ac 4:24; 14:15 (Ex 20:11); cp. 17:24. Following: οἱ μετʼ ἐμοῦ πάντες Tit 3:15a (πάντες οἱ μετʼ αὐτοῦ JosAs 27:7).
    ⓒ π. used w. pronouns
    α. w. personal pronouns: πάντες ἡμεῖς we all Ac 2:32; 10:33a; 26:14; 28:2; Ro 4:16b. πάντες ὑμεῖς Mt 23:8; 26:31; Lk 9:48; Ac 4:10a; 22:3; Ro 1:8; 15:33; 2 Cor 7:15; Gal 3:28; Phil 1:4, 7ab, 8; 1 Th 1:2; 2 Th 3:16c, 18; Tit 3:15b; Hb 13:25. πάντες αὐτοί Ac 4:33; 19:17b; 20:36. Following the pron.: ἡμεῖς πάντες J 1:16; Ro 8:32a; 2 Cor 3:18; Eph 2:3. ὑμεῖς πάντες Ac 20:25. αὐτοὶ πάντες Mt 12:15; 1 Cor 15:10. W. art. οἱ πάντες ἡμεῖς 2 Cor 5:10.
    β. w. a demonstr. pron.: πάντες οὗτοι these all, all these Ac 2:7 v.l. Mostly following the pron.: οὗτοι πάντες 1:14; 17:7; Hb 11:13, 39. πάντα ταῦτα Mt 6:32; 24:8; Lk 7:18; Ac 24:8; 1 Cor 12:11; Col 3:14; 1 Th 4:6; Hm 5, 2, 5 cj. Joly. ταῦτα πάντα Mt 4:9; 6:33; 13:34, 51; Lk 12:30; Ac 7:50; Ro 8:37; 2 Pt 3:11.
    γ. πάντες ὅσοι, πάντα ὅσα all who, everything that, masc.: Lk 4:40 v.l. (for ἅπαντες); J 10:8. Neut. (TestAbr A 9 p. 86, 17 [Stone p. 20]; TestJob 4:2; GrBar 7:2; Philo, Aet. M. 15; 28; Jos., Ant. 8, 242; Just., A I, 44, 9) Mt 7:12; 13:46; 18:25; 21:22; Mk 11:24; 12:44b; Lk 18:12, 22; J 10:41. πάντες, ὸ̔ς ἄν Hs 7:7.
    ⓓ subst.
    α. πάντες, πᾶσαι all, everyone (even when only two are involved = both: Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 27 §105 [Caesar and Pompey]) Mt 10:22; 14:20; 15:37; 21:26; 26:27; Mk 1:37; 5:20; Lk 1:63 and oft. πάντες ἥμαρτον Ro 5:12 (on the sinfulness of πάντες cp. the saying of Bias s.v. πολύς 1aβא; FDanker, Ro 5:12, Sin under Law, NTS 14, ’68, 430, n. 1).—οὐ πάντες not everyone Mt 19:11. Cp. J 13:10; Ro 10:16.—πάντων as partitive and comparative gen. ὕστερον πάντων last of all Mt 22:27; cp. Mk 12:22, 43. Even in ref. to a fem. (Thu. 4, 52, 3; Aristoph., Av. 472) ἐντολὴ πρώτη πάντων Mk 12:28 (but s. B-D-F §164, 1).
    β. πάντα all things, everything. Abs. (Chrysippus in Stob., Ecl. 1, 1, 26 p. 31 W.; Ps.-Aristot., De Mundo 6; M. Ant. 4, 23; Ael. Aristid. 43, 9 K.=1 p. 3 D.: ἀρχὴ ἁπάντων Ζεύς τε καὶ ἐκ Διὸς πάντα; Herm. Wr. 5, 10; Hymn to Selene in PGM 4, 2838f ἐκ σέο γὰρ πάντʼ ἐστὶ καὶ εἰς σʼ, αἰώνιε, πάντα τελευτᾷ [s. 4dβ]; PGM 5, 139; PKöln VI, 245, 16 of Athena [s. ed.’s comments]) Mt 11:27 = Lk 10:22 (s. the lit. on this pass. s.v. υἱός 2dβ. The word πάντα here is variously understood of authority and power [so ASchlatter (Mt), FBüchsel (TW II 173) et al.] or of knowledge and teaching: ENorden [Agn. Th. 288], TZahn [Mt], Grundmann [Lk] et al.; also JFitzmyer: “the knowledge of the mutual relation of himself and God” [AB Comm. Luke II 874]. IMarshall [Lk] follows BReicke [TW V 993 n. 289] and opts for both power and knowledge); J 1:3; 3:35; 21:17; 1 Cor 2:10; 15:27a (Ps 8:7), b, 28cd (πάντα ἐν πᾶσιν w. a somewhat different coloring: Dio Chrys. 54 [71], 1); Eph 1:22a (Ps 8:7); Rv 21:5. Here we may class ὁ ὢν ἐπὶ πάντων θεός (cp. Aristobulus in Eus., PE 8, 10, 10; 13, 12, 4 ἐπὶ πάντων εἶναι τ. θεόν; Porphyr., Vi. Plot. 23 τῷ ἐπὶ πᾶσι θεῷ) God, who rules over all Ro 9:5 (θεός 2). ὁ πάντων δεσπότης GJs 20:3 (codd.); cp. 11:2.—Of a ‘whole’ that is implied fr. the context: πάντα ἀποδώσω σοι Mt 18:26. Cp. 22:4; Mk 4:34; Lk 1:3; Ro 8:28 (s. Black s.v. συνεργέω); 2 Cor 6:10; Gal 4:1; Phil 2:14; 1 Th 5:21; 2 Ti 2:10; Tit 1:15; 1J 2:27; GJs 18:3 codd. πάντα ὑμῶν ἐστιν everything is yours, belongs to you 1 Cor 3:21, cp. 22 (Plut., Cic. 873 [25, 4] πάντα τοῦ σοφοῦ εἶναι; Diog. L. 6, 72). πάντα ὑμῶν everything you do 16:14. πρῶτον πάντων 1 Ti 2:1. πάντα four times as anaphora (rhetorical repetition) 1 Cor 13:7 (cp. Libanius, Or. 3 p. 275, 4 πάντα φθεγγόμενοι, πάντα ἐργαζόμενοι, πάντα χαριζόμενοι).—The acc. of specification stands almost in the sense of an adv. (B-D-F §154; Rob. 487) πάντα in all respects, in every way, altogether (Hom. et al.; Aelian, VH 12, 25; Jos., Ant. 9, 166; SibOr 3, 205; Ath. 35, 2) Ac 20:35 (perh. always, as Ps.-Lucian, Asin. 22 p. 590); 1 Cor 9:25b. πάντα πᾶσιν ἀρέσκω (s. ἀρέσκω 2a) 10:33; 11:2. Cp. KGrobel, JBL 66, ’47, 366 and s. τὰ πάντα in 4dβ below.—W. a prep.: εἰς πάντα in all respects, in every way (Pla., Charm. 6, 158a, Leg. 5, 738a; Appian, Iber. 17 §64, Bell. Civ. 4, 92 §385; BGU 798, 7) 2 Cor 2:9. ἐν πᾶσιν in all respects, in every way (PGiss 69, 8; Appian, Bell. Civ. 2, 112 §467 [here ἐν ἅπασιν=in all respects]; Just., D. 80, 1 ἀσφαλὴς ἐν πᾶσι); 1 Ti 3:11; 2 Ti 2:7; 4:5; Tit 2:9, 10b; Hb 13:4, 18; 1 Pt 4:11. Perh. also Eph 1:23b. ἐν πᾶσι τούτοις in (or besides) all this (Sir 48:15; Job 2:10; 12:9; cp. Plut., Mor. 98f) Lk 16:26. κατὰ πάντα, s. κατά B 6. περὶ πάντων in every way (Mitt-Wilck I/2, 6, 9; SibOr 1, 198) 3J 2. πρὸ πάντων above all, especially (PRein 18, 27 [II B.C.]; BGU 811, 3; PAmh 135, 2; Just., D. 7, 3) Js 5:12; 1 Pt 4:8.
    ② any entity out of a totality, any and every, every
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing. without the article every, any and every, just any, any at all μὴ παντὶ πνεύματι πιστεύετε do not believe just any spirit 1J 4:1. περιφερόμενοι παντὶ ἀνέμῳ τῆς διδασκαλίας Eph 4:14. περὶ παντὸς πράγματος about anything Mt 18:19. κατὰ πᾶσαν αἰτίαν for any reason at all 19:3. Cp. 4:4=Lk 4:4 v.l. (Dt 8:3); Mt 12:31; 2 Cor 1:4b (on ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν vs. 4a see 3b below).
    ⓑ as subst. without the art.
    α. πᾶς everyone without exception Lk 16:16.
    β. πᾶν, w. prep.: διὰ παντός s. διά A 2a. ἐν παντί in every respect or way, in everything (Pla., Symp. 194a; X., Hell. 5, 4, 29; SIG 1169, 27; Sir 18:27; 4 Macc 8:3; GrBar 9:8) πλουτίζεσθαι 1 Cor 1:5; 2 Cor 9:11. Cp. 2 Cor 4:8; 7:5, 11, 16; 8:7; 9:8b; 11:6a, 9; Eph 5:24; Phil 4:6; 1 Th 5:18.
    ③ marker of the highest degree of someth., all
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing. without the art. full, greatest, all (Pla., Rep. 9, 575a; Demosth. 18, 279 al.; ins, freq. in accolades; pap.: New Docs 8 p. 62, 10 μετὰ πάσης πίστεως καὶ ἐπιμελείας ‘with all fidelity and care’; LXX; Tat. 39, 1 μετὰ πάσης ἀκριβείας) μετὰ παρρησίας πάσης Ac 4:29. ἐν πάσῃ ἀσφαλείᾳ 5:23. πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ in all good conscience 23:1. Cp. 17:11; 24:3; 2 Cor 9:8b; 12:12; Eph 4:2. ἐν πάσῃ προσκαρτερήσει with the greatest perseverance 6:18c. Cp. Phil 1:20; 2:29; Col 1:11ab; 1 Ti 2:2b, 11; 3:4; 4:9; 5:2; Tit 2:15; Js 1:2; 2 Pt 1:5; Jd 3 al. ὑπομένειν πᾶσαν ὑπομονήν practice patient endurance to the limit Pol 9:1.
    ⓑ in related vein as adj. with noun in the sing. w. the art. all ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ θλίψει ἡμῶν in all our trouble 2 Cor 1:4a (on ἐν πάσῃ θλίψει vs. 4b s. 2a above); 7:4; 1 Th 3:7. ἐπὶ πάσῃ τῇ μνείᾳ ὑμῶν in all remembrance of you Phil 1:3. πᾶσαν τὴν μέριμναν ὑμῶν all your care 1 Pt 5:7. τὸν πάντα χρόνον AcPlCor 2:4; τὴν πᾶσαν σάρκα 2:11 (cp. 1aα).
    ④ pert. to a high degree of completeness or wholeness, whole
    ⓐ as adj. w. a noun in the sing., without the art. all, the whole before proper names, mostly geographic (X., Hell. 4, 8, 28 προστάται πάσης Λέσβου ἔσονται al.; LXX) πᾶσα Ἱεροσόλυμα Mt 2:3 (s. Ἱερ.). πᾶς Ἰσραήλ (3 Km 8:65; 11:16; 1 Esdr 1:19; 5:45, 58; Jdth 15:14) Ro 11:26 (s. W-S. §20, 11a and b; Rob. 772). The OT is also the source of πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραήλ (1 Km 7:2, 3) Ac 2:36 and, in subject matter, ἐπὶ παντὸς προσώπου τῆς γῆς 17:26b (but Gen 2:6 has πᾶν τὸ πρόσωπον τῆς γῆς, and 7:23; 11:4, 8, 9 ἐπὶ προσώπου [or πρόσωπον] πάσης τῆς γῆς).—Perh. πᾶσα οἰκοδομή Eph 2:21 (s. W-S. §20:11 b; Rob. 772; Mlt-Turner 199f; MDibelius, Hdb. ad loc.; M. Ant. 6, 36, 1; OGI 383, 86ff).
    ⓑ w. a noun in the sing., w. the art. the whole, all (the). Preceding the noun that has the art.: πᾶσα ἡ Ἰουδαία καὶ πᾶσα ἡ περίχωρος Mt 3:5. πᾶσα ἡ ἀγέλη the whole herd 8:32. Cp. vs. 34; 13:2; 21:10; 27:25, 45; Mk 2:13; 4:1. πᾶσα ἡ ἀλήθεια 5:33. πᾶσα ἡ κτίσις the whole creation (TestAbr A 13 p. 92, 7 [Stone p. 32]) Mk 16:15; Ro 8:22. Cp. Lk 1:10; 2:1, 10; Ac 3:9, 11; 5:21; 15:12. πᾶς ὁ κόσμος Ro 3:19b; Col 1:6. πᾶν τὸ σπέρμα Ro 4:16. πᾶσα ἡ γῆ 9:17 (Ex 9:16); Lk 4:25. πᾶσα ἡ γνῶσις, πᾶσα ἡ πίστις 1 Cor 13:2bc. πᾶν τὸ πλήρωμα Eph 3:19; Col 1:19; 2:9. πᾶν τὸ σῶμα Eph 4:16; Col 2:19. Cp. Hb 9:19bc. W. a demonstrative pron. πᾶς ὁ λαὸς οὗτος all these people Lk 9:13. πᾶσα ἡ ὀφειλὴ ἐκείνη Mt 18:32.—Following the noun that has the article: τὴν κρίσιν πᾶσαν the whole matter of judgment J 5:22. εἰς τὴν ἀλήθειαν πᾶσαν into truth in all its outreach 16:13. τὴν ἐξουσίαν … πᾶσαν Rv 13:12.
    ⓒ πᾶς and πάντες stand attributively betw. art. and noun, when the noun is regarded as a whole, in contrast to its individual parts (cp. Kühner-G. I 632f).
    α. sing. (Thu. 2, 7, 2 ὁ πᾶς ἀριθμόσ=‘the whole number’; 8, 93, 2 τὸ πᾶν πλῆθος; X., Mem. 1, 2, 8 εἰς τὸν πάντα βίον; Pla., Gorg. 470e ἡ πᾶσα εὐδαιμονία; 2 Macc 2:17; 3 Macc 1:29; 6:14; 4 Macc 3:8) ὁ πᾶς νόμος the whole law Gal 5:14. τὸν πάντα χρόνον Ac 20:18.
    β. pl. (X., An. 5, 6, 7 οἱ πάντες ἄνθρωποι; Pla., Theaet. 204a τὰ πάντα μέρη) αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαί all the souls Ac 27:37. οἱ κατὰ τὰ ἔθνη πάντες Ἰουδαῖοι 21:21. οἱ σὺν αὐτοῖς πάντες ἅγιοι Ro 16:15. οἱ σὺν ἐμοὶ πάντες ἀδελφοί Gal 1:2.—W. numerals (Hdt. 7, 4; Thu. 1, 60, l) οἱ πάντες ἄνδρες ὡσεὶ δώδεκα the whole number of the men was about twelve Ac 19:7.—JBover, Uso del adjetivo singular πᾶς en San Pablo: Biblica 19, ’38, 411–34.
    ⓓ as subst.
    α. οἱ πάντες all (of them) (in contrast to a part) Ro 11:32ab; 1 Cor 9:22 (s. HChadwick, NTS 1, ’55, 261–75); Phil 2:21. (We, they) all Mk 14:64; 1 Cor 10:17; 2 Cor 5:14b. μέχρι καταντήσωμεν οἱ πάντες until we all attain Eph 4:13.
    β. τὰ πάντα. In the abs. sense of the whole of creation all things, the universe (Pla., Ep. 6, 323d τῶν πάντων θεός; hymn to Selene in EAbel, Orphica [1885] 294, 36 εἰς σὲ τὰ πάντα τελευτᾶ [s. 1dβ beg.]; Herm. Wr. 13, 17 τ. κτίσαντα τὰ πάντα; JosAs 8:2 ζωοποιήσας τὰ πάντα; Philo, Spec. Leg. 1, 208, Rer. Div. Her. 36, Somn. 1, 241; Just., A I, 67, 2 τὸν ποιητὴν τῶν πάντων; PGM 1, 212 κύριε τῶν πάντων; 4, 3077) Ro 11:36 (Musaeus: Vorsokr. 2 A 4 [in Diog. L. 1, 3] ἐξ ἑνὸς τὰ πάντα γίνεσθαι καὶ εἰς ταὐτὸν ἀναλύεσθαι. Cp. Norden, Agn. Th. 240–50); 1 Cor 8:6ab; 15:28ab; Eph 3:9; 4:10b; Phil 3:21; Col 1:16ab, 17b (HHegermann, D. Vorstellung vom Schöpfungsmittler etc., TU 82, ’61, 88ff); Hb 1:3; 2:10ab; Rv 4:11; 1 Cl 34:2; PtK 2 (four times).—In the relative sense, indicated by the context, everything (Κυπρ. I p. 42 no. 29 τὰς στοὰς καὶ τὰ ἐν αὐταῖς πάντα; PGiss 2, 14 [II B.C.] in a bill: τὰ π.=everything taken together) ἐν παραβολαῖς τὰ πάντα γίνεται everything (=all the instruction) is in parables Mk 4:11. Cp. Ac 17:25b; Ro 8:32b. Of everything in heaven and earth that is in need of uniting and redeeming Eph 1:10 (EWalter, Christus u. d. Kosmos [Eph 1:10] ’48); Col 1:20. τὰ πάντα they all (of the members of the body) 1 Cor 12:19. The neut. is also used of persons: Gal 3:22; cp. 1 Ti 6:13 (here including humankind and everything else that possesses life).—As acc. of specification, almost like an adv.: τὰ πάντα in all respects (Appian, Prooem. 6 §23) Eph 4:15 (s. 1dβ).—As a summation of what precedes all this (PCairZen 741, 16; 742, 22; BGU 1509 [all III B.C.]) 2 Cor 4:15; Phil 3:8b; Col 3:8.—Furthermore, πάντες can also have the limited sense nearly all (Xenophon Eph. 2, 13, 4 πάντας ἀπέκτεινεν, ὀλίγους δὲ καὶ ζῶντας ἔλαβε. μόνος δὲ ὁ Ἱππόθοος ἠδυνήθη διαφυγεῖν).—Mlt-Turner 199–201.
    ⑤ everything belonging, in kind, to the class designated by the noun, every kind of, all sorts of, adj. for the words παντοδαπός and παντοῖος, which are lacking in our lit.: πᾶσα νόσος καὶ πᾶσα μαλακία Mt 4:23. γέμουσιν πάσης ἀκαθαρσίας they are full of all kinds of uncleanness 23:27 (Ar. 15, 6). πᾶσα ἐξουσία 28:18. ἀπὸ παντὸς ἔθνους from every kind of nation Ac 2:5. Cp. 7:22; 13:10ab; Ro 1:18, 29. πᾶσα ἐπιθυμία (evil) desire of every kind 7:8. ἐν παντὶ λόγῳ καὶ πάσῃ γνώσει 1 Cor 1:5b. πᾶν ἁμάρτημα every kind of sin 6:18. Cp. 2 Cor 7:1; 9:8bc; 10:5ab; Eph 1:3, 8, 21a; 4:19; 5:3; Phil 1:9; 2 Th 2:17. πᾶν ἔργον ἀγαθόν Tit 1:16; 3:1. Cp. 2:14; Hb 13:21. πᾶσα δόσις, πᾶν δώρημα Js 1:17 (W-S. §20, 11b). Cp. vs. 21; 1 Pt 2:1ab; Rv 8:7 al.—B. 919. Schmidt, Syn. IV, 540–54, s. ἕκαστος and ὅλος. DELG. M-M. EDNT. TW. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > πᾶς

  • 39 ἐλπίς

    ἐλπίς, ίδος, ἡ (s. ἐλπίζω; Hom.+ ‘expectation, hope’, also ‘foreboding’ Aeschyl. et al.)
    ① the looking forward to someth. with some reason for confidence respecting fulfillment, hope, expectation:
    ⓐ gener. hope, expectation, prospect ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι (for the spelling s. 1bα below) in hope (Ps.-Pla., Alc. 1, 105a ἐπὶ τίνι ἐλπίδι ζῇς; Eur., Herc. Fur. 804; X., Mem. 2, 1, 18; Diod S 13, 21, 7; Jos., Ant. 4, 36) 1 Cor 9:10a in a quotation (source unknown; cp. Sir. 6:19). παρʼ ἐλπίδα contrary to (all human) expectation (Aeschyl., Ag. 899; Aeneas Tact. 1020; Lycophron vs. 535; Dionys. Hal. 6, 25; Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 22 §85; Philo, Mos. 1, 250; Jos., Bell. 3, 183, Vi. 380; Just., D. 2, 5) Ro 4:18. W. objective gen. (Diod S 16, 55, 4 τῆς εὐεργεσίας ἐλπίς; Appian, Celt. 1 §9 ἐλπὶς ἀναβιώσεως; Jos., Vi. 325 ἐ. κέρδους; Just., D. 8, 3 ἐ. … ἀμείνονος μοίρας) ἐλπὶς τ. ἐργασίας hope of gain Ac 16:19; μετανοίας IEph 10:1; Hs 6, 2, 4; 8, 7, 2; 8, 10, 2. W. gen. of the inf. (Dositheus 19, 6 ἐ. τοῦ δύνασθαι; Ath. 33, 1 τοῦ συνέσεσθαι θεῷ) τοῦ σῴζεσθαι Ac 27:20; τοῦ μετέχειν 1 Cor 9:10b. ἐλπίδα ἔχειν (oft. LXX and non-bibl. wr.) w. gen. of the inf. τοῦ μετανοῆσαι Hs 8, 6, 5. τῇ ἐ. ἐσώθημεν we are saved (or possess salvation) only in hope/anticipation (not yet in reality) Ro 8:24 (Diod S 20, 40, 1 περιεβάλετο ταῖς ἐλπίσι μείζονα δυναστείαν=he entertained prospects of control over a larger realm). ἡ ἐ. ἡμῶν βεβαία ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν our expectations involving you are well founded (Paul is confident that the Cor. will hold out under oppression in the future as they have in the past) 2 Cor 1:7. Of the confidence that the Jews placed in their temple ματαία ἡ ἐ. αὐτῶν B 16:2 (on empty hope, s. Reader, Polemo 313).
    ⓑ esp. pert. to matters spoken of in God’s promises, hope
    α. without specif. ref. to Christian hope ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι (for the spelling ἐφʼ ἑλπίδι s. B-D-F §14; Rob. 224 and cp. an ins fr. Asia Minor: PASA II, 1888, p. 89 ln. 15 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδος and ln. 26 ἐφʼ ἑλπίδος) in (the) hope (Diod S 13, 21, 7 ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι [σωτηρίας]) Ro 8:20 (B-D-F §235, 2); cp. Tit 1:2. ἐπʼ ἐλπίδι ἐπίστευσεν full of hope he believed (in God) Ro 4:18. The ἐπʼ ἐ. of Ac 2:26 could also be understood in this way, but it is also prob. that in this quot. fr. Ps 15:9 the OT mng. in safety (Judg 18:7 B, 27 B; Hos 2:20; Pr 1:33) is correct, as 1 Cl 57:7 (Pr 1:33), unless, with Lat., Syr., and Copt. transl. and Clem. Al., Strom. 2, 22 πεποιθώς is to be added. Of Israel’s messianic hope Ac 23:6 (ἐ. καὶ ἀνάστασις for ἐ. τῆς ἀν. [obj. gen.] as 2 Macc 3:29 ἐ. καὶ σωτηρία); 26:6; 28:20. In imagery of one who combines γνώσις with interest in ζωή Dg 12:6.
    β. of Christian expectation: abs. Ro 5:4f; 12:12; 15:13; 1 Cor 13:13 (cp. Pol. 3:3; on the triad: faith, hope, love s. on ἀγάπη 1aα; s. also WWeis, ZNW 84, ’93, 196–217); Hb 3:6; 6:11; 10:23; 1 Pt 3:15; Agr. 7; 2 Cl 17:7; IEph 1:2; IMg 7:1; expectation of resurrection 1 Cl 27:1. ἐ. ἀγαθή (Pla., Phd. 67c; X., Mem. 2, 1, 18 et al.; FCumont, Lux Perpetua ’49 p. 401–5 with numerous reff., including some from the mystery religions [IG V/2 p. 63: 64/61 B.C.]; μετὰ ἀγαθῆς ἐ. Hippol., Ref. 4, 49, 3; cp. ἐ. ἔχειν … ἀρίστας Orig., C. Cels. 4, 27, 14) 2 Th 2:16 (POtzen, ZNW 49, ’58, 283–85); ἐ. κρείττων Hb 7:19; ἐ. ζῶσα 1 Pt 1:3; cp. εἰς ἐ. B. 11:8. τὸ κοινὸν τῆς ἐ. the common hope 1 Cl 51:1; cp. κοινὴ ἐ. IPh 5:2; καινότης ἐλπίδος new hope IMg 9:1. W. subj. gen. Phil 1:20; ἐ. τῶν ἐκλεκτῶν 1 Cl 58:2; cp. 57:2. W. obj. gen., which designates the obj. of the hope (Ps.-Callisth. 1, 18, 1 ἱλαρὸς ἐπὶ τῇ τοῦ τέκνου ἐλπίδι=glad because of hope for the son; τῆς ἀναστάσεως Iren. 4, 18, 5 [Harv. II 208, 2]; Orig., C. Cels. 3, 3, 9; Did., Gen. 216, 16) ἐπʼ ἐ. τῆς ἐπαγγελίας because of hope in the promise Ac 26:6, cp. vs. 7; ἐ. ζωῆς αἰωνίου Tit 1:2; 3:7 (Ath. 33, 1); cp. B 1:4, 6; Hs 9, 26, 2; ἐ. τῆς δόξης τ. θεοῦ Ro 5:2; cp. Col 1:27; ἐ. σωτηρίας (cp. Aeneas Tact. ln. 14; Lucian, Abdic. 31; En 98:14; Philo, Leg. ad Gai. 329; Jos., Bell. 3, 194) 1 Th 5:8; 2 Cl 1:7. ἐλπίδα δικαιοσύνης ἀπεκδεχόμεθα Gal 5:5 is also obj. gen., since it is a blending of the two expressions ‘we await righteousness’ and ‘we have expectation of righteousness’ (cp. Job 2:9a προσδεχόμενος τὴν ἐλπίδα τῆς σωτηρίας μου); ἐ. τοῦ κυρίου ἡμῶν 1 Th 1:3 prob. belongs here also: hope in our Lord.—The gen. can also give the basis for the expectation: ἐ. τοῦ εὐαγγελίου hope that is based on the gospel Col 1:23; ἐ. τῆς κλήσεως the hope that is given w. the calling Eph 1:18; 4:4; ἐ. τῆς πίστεως hope that faith affords B 4:8; ὁ θεὸς τῆς ἐ. Ro 15:13. Sim. ἐ. εἰς (Plut., Galba 1061 [19, 6]; Achilles Tat. 6, 17, 5): ἐ. εἰς θεόν (εἰς τὸν θεόν Did., Gen. 150, 26) hope in God or directed towards God 1 Pt 1:21 (cp. AcThom 28 [Aa II/2, 145, 4]); εἰς τ. Ἰησοῦν B 11:11; cp. ἐ. ἐν (αὐτῷ Diod S 17, 26, 2): ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι αὐτοῦ Mt 12:21 v.l. ἐπὶ λίθον ἡ ἐ.; is (our) hope based on a stone? (w. ref. to Is 28:16) B 6:3.—As obj. of ἔχω: ἔχειν ἐλπίδα Ro 15:4; 2 Cor 3:12 (cp. Just., D. 141, 3); ἐ. μὴ ἔχοντες (Diod S 21, 12, 1 μηδεμίαν ἔχειν ἐλπίδα σωτηρίας) Eph 2:12; 1 Th 4:13; Hv 3, 11, 3; Hs 9, 14, 3; οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἐλπίδα (Wsd 3:18) Hv 1, 1, 9; ἀπώλεσάς σου τὴν πᾶσαν ἐ. 33, 7. W. ἐπί τινι in someone 1J 3:3 (cp. Appian, Bell. Civ. 3, 86 §354 ἐφʼ ἑνί; Lucian, Somn. 2; Ps 61:8; Is 26:3f; ἐπὶ τῇ μετανοίᾳ Orig., C. Cels. 3, 65, 17); likew. εἴς τινα (Thu. 3, 14, 1;—Appian, Liby. 51 §223 ἐλπίδα τῆς σωτηρίας ἔχειν ἔν τινι=place a hope of safety in someone) Ac 24:15; πρός τινα ibid. v.l. The obj. of the hope follows in the aor. inf. 2 Cor 10:15; in the acc. w. inf. Ac 24:15; w. ὅτι Ro 8:20f (v.l. διότι [q.v. 4]); Phil 1:20.
    ② that which is the basis for hoping, (foundation of) hope (ἐλπὶς … σύ, ὁ θεός PsSol 15:1; Thu. 3, 57, 4 ὑμεῖς, ὦ Λακεδαιμόνιοι, ἡ μόνη ἐλπίς; Plut., Mor. 169c; Oenom. in Eus., PE 5, 23, 5: for the Athenians in the Persian Wars, σωτηρίας ἐλπὶς μόνος ὁ θεός=God was their only hope for deliverence; IG III, 131, 1; Jer 17:7) of a Christian community 1 Th 2:19; of Christ, our hope 1 Ti 1:1 (sim. POxy 3239 [II A.D.] of Isis; New Docs 2, 77; EJudge, TynBull 35, ’84, 8); cp. Col 1:27; IEph 21:2; IPhld 11:2; IMg 11; ISm 10:2; ITr ins; 2:2; Pol 8:1.
    ③ that for which one hopes, hope, something hoped for (Vi. Aesopi G 8 P. ἀπὸ θεῶν λήμψεσθαι ἐλπίδας) ἐ. βλεπομένη οὐκ ἔστιν ἐ. something hoped for, when it is seen, is no longer hoped for=one cannot hope for what one already has Ro 8:24. διὰ τ. ἐλπίδα τὴν ἀποκειμένην ὑμῖν ἐν τ. οὐρανοῖς because of what you hope for, which is stored up for you in the heavens Col 1:5; προσδεχόμενοι τ. μακαρίαν ἐ. waiting for the blessed hope Tit 2:13 (cp. 2 Macc 7:14 τὰς ὐπὸ τοῦ θεοῦ προσδοκᾶν ἐλπίδας and Aristot. EN 1, 9, 10 οἱ δὲ λεγόμενοι διὰ τὴν ἐλπίδα μακαρίζονται of children who may be called fortunate in the present only because of latent promise). ἡ προκειμένη ἐ. Hb 6:18 (cp. Just., D. 35, 2 ἐν τῇ ἐ. κατηγγελμένῃ ὑπʼ αὐτοῦ).—PVolz, D. Eschatol. der jüd. Gemeinde ’34, 91ff; JdeGuibert, Sur l’emploi d’ ἐλπίς et ses synonymes dans le NT: RSR 4, 1913, 565–96; APott, D. Hoffen im NT 1915; WGrossouw, L’espérance dans le NT: RB 61, ’54, 508–32; DDenton, SJT 34, ’81, 313–20 (link w. ὑπομονή).—B. 1164. Schmidt, Syn. III 583–90. DELG s.v. ἔλπομαι. M-M. EDNT. TW. Spicq. Sv.

    Ελληνικά-Αγγλικά παλαιοχριστιανική Λογοτεχνία > ἐλπίς

  • 40 ψιλός

    ψῑλός, ή, όν,
    I of land, bare, ψ. ἄροσις open cornland, Il.9.580;

    πεδίον μέγα τε καὶ ψ. Hdt.1.80

    ;

    ὁ λόφος.. δασὺς ἴδῃσί ἐστι, ἐούσης τῆς ἄλλης Λιβύης ψ. Id.4.175

    ;

    ἀπὸ ψ. τῆς γῆς Pl.Criti. 111d

    , cf. X.An.1.5.5, etc.: in full, [

    γῆ] ψ. δενδρέων Hdt.4.19

    ,21; ἄδενδρα καὶ ψ., of the Alps, Plb.3.55.9; τὰ ψ. (sc. χωρία), opp. τὰ ὑλώδη, X.Cyn.5.7; τόποι ψ. ib.4.6; ψ. γεωργία the tillage of land for corn and the like, opp. γ. πεφυτευμένη (the tillage of it for vines, olives, etc.), Arist.Pol. 1258b18, Thphr.CP3.20.1; so

    γῆ ψ. Eup. 230

    , D.20.115, Tab.Heracl.1.175, 2.33;

    ἐλαῖαι, ὧν νῦν τὰ πολλὰ ἐκκέκοπται καὶ ἡ γῆ ψ. γεγένηται Lys.7.7

    .
    II of animals, stripped of hair or feathers, smooth (cf.

    λεῖος 1.3

    ),

    δέρμα.. ἐλάφοιο Od.13.437

    ;

    σάρξ Hp.

    Aër.19; ἡμίκραιραν ψ. ἔχων with half the head shaved, Ar. Th. 227; ψ. γνάθοι ib. 583;

    τὴν ὀσφὺν κομιδῇ ψ. Pherecr.23.4

     (anap.); used of dogs with a short, smooth coat of hair, X.Cyn.3.2;

    τὴν δίποδα ἀγέλην τῷ ψ. καὶ τῷ πτεροφυεῖ τέμνειν Pl.Plt. 266e

    ;

    ἄνθρωπος -ότατον κατὰ τὸ σῶμα τῶν ζῴων πάντων ἐστί Arist.GA 745b16

    ; so ἶβις ψ. τὴν κεφαλήν without feathers, bald on the head, Hdt.2.76; hairless, of the foetus of a hare, Id.3.108; ψ. τὰ περὶ τὴν κεφαλήν, of the ostrich, Arist.PA 697b18.
    b ψιλαὶ Περσικαί Persian carpets, Callix.2; such a carpet is called ψιλή alone, PSI7.858.2 (iii B. C., pl.), LXXJo.7.21; ψιλὴ πολύμιτος, Babylonicum, Gloss.; ψιλή = aulaeum, tapeta, ibid.; cf. ψιλόταπις.
    2 generally, bare, uncovered, ψ. ὡς ὁρᾷ νέκυν, i. e. without any earth over it, S.Ant. 426; of a horse which has thrown its rider, AP13.18 ([place name] Parmeno).
    b c. gen., bare of, separated from, ψ. σώματος οὖσα [ἡ ψυχή] Pl.Lg. 899a;

    τέχναι ψ. τῶν πράξεων Id.Plt. 258d

    ;

    ψ. ὅπλων Id.Lg. 834c

    ;

    ἱππέων X.Cyr.5.3.57

    ;

    θηρία μεμονωμένα καὶ ψ. τῶν Ἰνδῶν Plb.11.1.12

    .
    c stripped of appendages, naked, ψ. [τρόπις] the bare keel with the planks torn from it, Od.12.421; ψ. μάχαιραι swords alone, without other arms, etc., X.Cyr.4.5.58; θάλαττα ψ. blank sea, Aristid.Or.25(43).50.
    III freq. in Prose, as a military term, of soldiers without heavy armour, light troops, such as archers and slingers, opp. ὁπλῖται, first in Hdt.7.158, al., freq. in Th., e. g.

    ὁπλίζει τὸν δῆμον, πρότερον ψ. ὄντα 3.27

    , cf. Arr.Tact.3.3;

    ὁ ψ. ὅμιλος Th.4.125

    ; so ψιλοί or τὸ ψιλόν, opp. τὸ ὁπλιτικόν, X.HG4.2.17, Arist.Pol. 1321a7; ψιλός, opp. ὡπλισμένος, S.Aj. 1123: coupled with ἄσκευος, Id.OC 1029;

    ψιλὸς στρατεύσομαι Ar.Th. 232

    ;

    ψ. δύναμις Arist.Pol. 1321a13

    ; αἱ κοῦφαι καὶ αἱ ψ. ἐργασίαι work that belongs to unarmed soldiers, ib. 1321a25;

    ψ. χερσὶν πρὸς καθωπλισμένους Ael.VH6.2

    : but ψ. ἔχων τὴν κεφαλήν bare-headed, without helmet, X.An.1.8.6; ψ. ἵππος a horse without housings, Id.Eq.7.5: unarmed, defenceless, S.Ph. 953.
    IV λόγος ψ. bare language, i. e. prose, opp. to poetry which is clothed in the garb of metre, Pl.Mx. 239c, Phld.Mus.p.97K.; more freq. in pl.,

    ψ. λόγοι Pl.Lg. 669d

    ; opp. τὰ μέτρα, Arist.Rh. 1404b14,33: but in D.27.54 ψ. λόγος is a mere speech, a speech unsupported by evidence; and in Pl.Tht. 165a ψιλοὶ λόγοι are mere forms of argumentation, dialectical abstractions (so ψιλῶς λέγειν speak nakedly, without alleging proofs, Id.Phdr. 262c, cf. Lg. 811e);

    τὰς πράξεις αὐτὰς ψιλὰς φράζοντες Arist.Rh.Al. 1438b27

    .
    2 ποίησις ψ. mere poetry, without music, i. e. Epic poetry, opp. Lyric ([etym.] ἡ ἐν ᾠδῇ), Pl.Phdr. 278c; so

    ἄνευ ὀργάνων ψ. λόγοι Id.Smp. 215c

    , cf. Arist.Po. 1447a29; ψ. τῷ στόματι, opp. μετ' ὀργάνων, as a kind of μουσική, Pl.Plt. 268b;

    λύρας φθόγγοι.. ψιλοὶ καὶ ἀμεικτότεροι τῇ φωνῇ Arist.Pr. 922a16

    ; ἡ ψ. φωνή the ordinary sound of the voice, opp. singing ([etym.] ἡ ᾠδική), D.H. Comp.11.
    3 ψ. μουσική instrumental music unaccompanied by the voice, opp. ἡ μετὰ μελῳδίας, Arist.Pol. 1339b20; ψιλῷ μέλει διαγωνίζεσθαι πρὸς ᾠδὴν καὶ κιθάραν, of Marsyas, Plu.2.713d, cf. Phld.Mus. p.100K.; so

    ψ. κιθάρισις καὶ αὔλησις Pl.Lg. 669e

    ; ψιλὸς αὐλητής one who plays unaccompanied on the flute (cf. ψιλοκιθαριστής), Phryn. 145.
    V mere, simple (cf. supr. IV. 1), ἀριθμητικὴ ψιλή, opp. geometry and the like , Pl.Plt. 299e; ὕδωρ ψ., opp. σὺν οἴνῳ, Hp.Int.35; ψ. ἀναίρεσις mere removal, Phld.Sign.12; ψ. ἄνδρες, i. e. men without women, Antip.Stoic.3.254:—Oedipus calls Antigone his ψιλὸν ὄμμα, as being the one poor eye left him, S.OC 866. Adv.

    ψιλῶς

     merely, only,

    Plu.Per.15

    ; ἕνεκα τοῦ ψ. εἰπεῖν for the purpose of merely saying, Sch. Il.Oxy.1086.65; ψ. ὀνομάζειν call by the bare name (without epithet), Phld.Vit.p.39J.
    VI Gramm. of vowels,

    ψ. ἦχος

     without the spiritus asper,

    Demetr.Eloc.73

    ;

    ψ. πνεῦμα A.D.Adv.148.9

    , D.T.Supp. 674.15;

    ψιλῶς λέγεσθαι A.D.Pron.57.3

    .
    b of the letters ε and υ written simply, not as αι and οι, which represented the sounds in late Gr.,

    μαθόντες τὰ διὰ τοῦ διφθόγγου ᾱῑ τυχὸν ἅπαντα, ἐδιδάχθημεν τὰ ἄλλα πάντα ψιλὰ γράφεσθαι Hdn.Epim. 162

    , cf. An.Ox.1.124: hence ἐψιλόν as name of the letter ε and ὐψιλόν as name of υ, which are first found in Anon. post Et.Gud.679.6, 678.55, and Chrysoloras: ἐ ψιλόν is f. l. in D.T.631.5: but in

    πᾶσα λέξις ἀπὸ τῆς κ ¯ ε ¯ συλλαβῆς ἀρχομένη διὰ τοῦ ε ¯ ψιλοῦ γράφεται.. πλὴν τοῦ καί, κτλ. Hdn.Epim.62

    , ε ¯ ψ. is not yet merely the name of the letter: for ὐψιλόν v. sub ὖ, cf. Sch. Heph.p.93C.
    2 of mute consonants, the litterae tenues, π κ τ, opp. φ χ θ, o(/sai gi/gnontai xwris th=s tou= pneu/matos e)kbolh=s Arist. Aud. 804b10, cf. D.H.Comp.14, D.T.631.21; ψιλῶς καλεῖν pronounce with a littera tenuis for an aspirate, e. g., ῥάπυς for ῥάφυς, ἀσπάραγος for ἀσφάραγος, Ath.9.369b, cf. Eust.81.5, Tz.H.11.58.

    Greek-English dictionary (Αγγλικά Ελληνικά-λεξικό) > ψιλός

Страницы

См. также в других словарях:

  • All horses are the same color — The horse paradox is a falsidical paradox that arises from flawed demonstrations, which purport to use mathematical induction, of the statement All horses are the same color . The paradox does not truly exist, as these arguments have a crucial… …   Wikipedia

  • The Wife of Bath's Prologue and Tale — The Wife of Bath s Tale and its Prologue are among the best known of Geoffrey Chaucer s Canterbury Tales . They give insight into the role of women in the Late Middle Ages and are probably of interest to Chaucer himself, for the character is one… …   Wikipedia

  • You Are the Quarry — Infobox Album Name = You Are the Quarry Type = Album Artist = Morrissey Released = 17 May, 2004 Recorded = 2003 Genre = Alternative rock Length = 47:20 Label = Sanctuary Producer = Jerry Finn Reviews = *Allmusic Rating|4|5… …   Wikipedia

  • The Lays of Beleriand — published in 1985, is the third volume of Christopher Tolkien s 12 volume book series, The History of Middle earth, in which he analyzes the unpublished manuscripts of his father J. R. R. Tolkien. The book contains the long lays or poems Tolkien …   Wikipedia

  • We Are the Champions — See also Af banen (Danish film also known as We Are the Champions) Infobox Single Name = We Are the Champions Artist = Queen from Album = News of the World B side = We Will Rock You Released = October 7, 1977 Format = 7 Recorded = 1977 Genre =… …   Wikipedia

  • The Physics of Blown Sand — and Desert Dunes (1941) is a science book, written by Ralph A. Bagnold. The book laid the foundations of the scientific investigation of the transport of sand by wind. It also discusses the formation and movement of sand dunes in the Libyan… …   Wikipedia

  • The Bahamas — This article is about the country. For the Canadian singer guitarist, see Bahamas (musician). Commonwealth of the Bahamas …   Wikipedia

  • The Sims — This article is about the first game in the series. For an overview of the whole series, see The Sims (series). For games with Sim in the title, see List of Sim games. The Sims North American box art Developer(s) …   Wikipedia

  • The inner sense — Sense Sense, n. [L. sensus, from sentire, sensum, to perceive, to feel, from the same root as E. send; cf. OHG. sin sense, mind, sinnan to go, to journey, G. sinnen to meditate, to think: cf. F. sens. For the change of meaning cf. {See}, v. t.… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • The internal sense — Sense Sense, n. [L. sensus, from sentire, sensum, to perceive, to feel, from the same root as E. send; cf. OHG. sin sense, mind, sinnan to go, to journey, G. sinnen to meditate, to think: cf. F. sens. For the change of meaning cf. {See}, v. t.… …   The Collaborative International Dictionary of English

  • The One (film) — Infobox Film name = The One caption = Promotional Poster for The One director = James Wong producer = Steve Chasman Glen Morgan Charles Newirth James Wong eproducer = Todd Garner Lata Ryan Tom Sherak Greg Silverman Happy Walters aproducer =… …   Wikipedia

Поделиться ссылкой на выделенное

Прямая ссылка:
… Нажмите правой клавишей мыши и выберите «Копировать ссылку»